ASAT Solutions Inc.

DAPstudio™

User Manual
(For DAP 5)

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 1

NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT & PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

©2008, ASAT Solutions Inc. All rights reserved.

The contents of this manual are the property of ASAT Solutions Inc. No part of this work may be reproduced
or transmitted in any form or by any means, except as permitted in written license agreement with ASAT
Solutions Inc. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Any attached hardware schematics and technical descriptions, or software listings that disclose source
code, are for information purposes only. Reproduction in whole or in part to create working hardware or
software for other than ASAT Solutions Inc. products is strictly prohibited except as permitted by written
liicense agreement with ASAT Solutions Inc.

TRADEMARK NOTICES

ASAT, DAP, VPort and are trademarks and service marks of ASAT Solutions Inc.

Microsoft Visio is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other brand and product names mentioned in
this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 2

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 9
Overview....................................................................................................................... 11
Client Applications ................................................................................................... 12
Server Applications................................................................................................... 13
Monitor Applications ................................................................................................ 14
VPort Applications.................................................................................................... 15
Installing DAPstudio™............................................................................................. 16
First Time Connection with the DAPserver™.......................................................... 20
Creating a New Project ............................................................................................. 24
Changing IP Addresses ................................................................................................. 27
Updating the DAP Server Firmware............................................................................. 31
DAPStudioTM .................................................................................................................... 34
Layout ........................................................................................................................... 35
Main Window ........................................................................................................... 35
Layout Window ........................................................................................................ 36
Main Menu and Toolbar ............................................................................................... 40
File Menu .................................................................................................................. 40
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................... 44
Connect ..................................................................................................................... 44
SCP Configuration .................................................................................................... 45
Download.................................................................................................................. 45
Switch Current Configuration............................................................................... 45
Update Firmware ...................................................................................................... 46
Modify Date and Time.............................................................................................. 46
Clear All Historic DB / Clear Historic Trending ...................................................... 47
System Menu ............................................................................................................ 47
Configure IP Address............................................................................................ 48
Configure IP Table................................................................................................ 52
Configure Router .................................................................................................. 58
Configure PPP Server ........................................................................................... 65
Configure NTP...................................................................................................... 68
Configure Time Zone............................................................................................ 72
User Login/Logout................................................................................................ 74
Reboot DAPserver™ ............................................................................................ 74
DAPstudio™ Projects................................................................................................... 75
Downloading a Project.............................................................................................. 76
Uploading a Project................................................................................................... 77
Device Information ....................................................................................................... 82
Properties .................................................................................................................. 82
Pseudo Point.............................................................................................................. 85
Basic Information.................................................................................................. 85
Value ..................................................................................................................... 85
System Pseudo Points ........................................................................................... 85

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 3

 Partner CPU Pseudo Points................................................................................... 88
System Port ............................................................................................................... 89
Webmin............................................................................................................................. 90
System....................................................................................................................... 90
Hardware................................................................................................................... 92
Communication................................................................................................................. 93
Port Group..................................................................................................................... 93
Serial ......................................................................................................................... 93
TCP/IP....................................................................................................................... 95
UDP/IP...................................................................................................................... 96
Client Applications ....................................................................................................... 98
Client Application Summary ................................................................................ 99
Client Application Pseudo Points ....................................................................... 100
Client Device Pseudo Points............................................................................... 104
Analog Inputs...................................................................................................... 106
Digital Inputs ...................................................................................................... 112
Counters .............................................................................................................. 117
Analog Outputs ................................................................................................... 120
Digital Outputs.................................................................................................... 126
Event Points ........................................................................................................ 130
IEC® 60870-5-101 .................................................................................................. 135
IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol Parameter............................................................... 135
IEC® 60870-5-101 Device .................................................................................. 135
Group Info........................................................................................................... 139
Counter Group Info............................................................................................. 140
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 141
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 142
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 143
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 144
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 145
IEC® 60870-5-103 .................................................................................................. 147
IEC® 60870-5-103 Protocol Parameter............................................................... 147
IEC® 60870-5-103 Device .................................................................................. 148
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 150
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 151
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 152
Event Point I/O Parameters................................................................................. 153
IEC® 60870-5-103 (Reyrolle) ................................................................................. 155
IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Protocol Parameter................................................ 155
IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Device ................................................................... 156
Analog Input Polling Table................................................................................. 158
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 158
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 159
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 159
Event Point I/O Parameters................................................................................. 160
IEC® 60870-5-104 .................................................................................................. 162

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 4

 IEC® 60870-5-104 Protocol Parameter............................................................... 162
IEC® 60870-5-104 Device .................................................................................. 165
Group Info........................................................................................................... 166
Counter Group Info............................................................................................. 167
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 167
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 168
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 169
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 170
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 170
DNP 3...................................................................................................................... 172
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 172
DNP 3 Device ..................................................................................................... 173
DNP 3 Polling Table........................................................................................... 175
DNP 3 Device Pseudo Points.............................................................................. 176
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 177
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 178
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 178
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 179
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 180
Modbus ................................................................................................................... 181
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 181
Modbus Device ................................................................................................... 181
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 185
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 187
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 189
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 190
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 192
Event Point I/O Parameters................................................................................. 193
Courier .................................................................................................................... 195
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 195
Courier Device .................................................................................................... 196
Courier Polling Table.......................................................................................... 197
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 198
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 199
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 200
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 201
Event Point I/O Parameters................................................................................. 203
SPA-Bus.................................................................................................................. 204
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 204
SPA-Bus Device ................................................................................................. 204
SPA-Bus Polling Table ....................................................................................... 206
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 208
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 208
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 210
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 210
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 211
Event Point I/O Parameters................................................................................. 213

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 5

 Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL) .......................................................... 215
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 215
SEL Device ......................................................................................................... 216
SEL ASCII Polling Table ................................................................................... 218
Point Reference Table......................................................................................... 219
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 220
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 236
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 241
SC1801.................................................................................................................... 252
Protocol Parameters ............................................................................................ 252
SC1801 Device ................................................................................................... 253
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 255
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 256
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 256
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 257
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 258
Server Applications..................................................................................................... 260
Server Application Basics....................................................................................... 261
Server Application Summary.............................................................................. 261
Server Application Pseudo Points....................................................................... 262
Analog Inputs...................................................................................................... 264
Digital Inputs ...................................................................................................... 266
Counters .............................................................................................................. 268
Analog Outputs ................................................................................................... 270
Digital Outputs.................................................................................................... 271
IEC® 60870-5-101 .................................................................................................. 274
IEC® 60870-5-101 Host...................................................................................... 274
IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol Parameter............................................................... 275
Group Info........................................................................................................... 280
Counter Group Info............................................................................................. 281
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 281
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 283
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 285
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 286
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 288
IEC® 60870-5-104 .................................................................................................. 290
IEC® 60870-5-104 Host...................................................................................... 290
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 291
Group Info........................................................................................................... 295
Counter Group Info............................................................................................. 295
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 296
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 296
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 297
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 297
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 298
DNP 3...................................................................................................................... 299
DNP 3 Host ......................................................................................................... 299

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 6

 Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 300
Unsolicited Responses ........................................................................................ 302
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 304
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 305
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 307
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 308
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 309
Modbus ................................................................................................................... 310
Modbus Host....................................................................................................... 310
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 311
Analog Input I/O Parameters .............................................................................. 312
Digital Input I/O Parameters............................................................................... 314
Counter I/O Parameters....................................................................................... 315
Analog Output I/O Parameters............................................................................ 316
Digital Output I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 318
Monitor Applications.................................................................................................. 319
Monitoring Application Basics ............................................................................... 319
Monitor Application Summary ........................................................................... 319
Device Point Properties....................................................................................... 320
Protocol Parameter.............................................................................................. 320
Device Pseudo Points.......................................................................................... 320
Device Point I/O Parameters............................................................................... 320
Terminal Window ....................................................................................................... 322
View Modes ............................................................................................................ 323
Options.................................................................................................................... 323
Filtering................................................................................................................... 330
Protocol Layer..................................................................................................... 330
Frame Type ......................................................................................................... 332
Address ............................................................................................................... 332
Frame SubType................................................................................................... 333
Port...................................................................................................................... 334
Command Window ................................................................................................. 336
RESET ................................................................................................................ 336
BOOT.................................................................................................................. 338
SWITCH ............................................................................................................. 338
DEBUG............................................................................................................... 339
UNDEBUG ......................................................................................................... 341
LOCK.................................................................................................................. 342
UNLOCK............................................................................................................ 343
DISABLE............................................................................................................ 344
ENABLE............................................................................................................. 344
DO....................................................................................................................... 345
AO....................................................................................................................... 347
SHOW................................................................................................................. 348
Device Library ................................................................................................................ 350
Overview..................................................................................................................... 350

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 7

 Creating an IED Template ...................................................................................... 351
Using Device Library.......................................................................................... 351
Exporting From a Client Application ................................................................. 355
Modifying an IED Template................................................................................... 357
Removing IED Template(s).................................................................................... 360
Using IED Templates in Client Applications ......................................................... 363
Virtual Port...................................................................................................................... 368
Introduction................................................................................................................. 368
DAPStudio Setup .................................................................................................... 369
Creating a New VPort Channel............................................................................... 369
Deleting a VPort Channel ....................................................................................... 370
Application Summary ............................................................................................. 371
Network Port........................................................................................................... 371
PC Setup.................................................................................................................. 375
Programmable Logic....................................................................................................... 377
Script Language .......................................................................................................... 377
Point Naming Conventions ..................................................................................... 378
Script Language Syntax .......................................................................................... 381
Arithmetic Operators .......................................................................................... 381
Logic Operators .................................................................................................. 382
Comparison Operators ........................................................................................ 382
Bit Operators....................................................................................................... 382
Mathematical Functions...................................................................................... 387
System Functions ................................................................................................ 389
Logic Application ................................................................................................... 391
Programmable Logic Application Examples .......................................................... 398
Calculated Pseudo Points........................................................................................ 401
Control Lockout ...................................................................................................... 404
Batch Control .......................................................................................................... 406
Programming Examples using Conditional Statements.......................................... 413
Bit Operators and the Modulo Operator ................................................................. 416
DAPguard Security Appliction ....................................................................................... 419
Overview..................................................................................................................... 419
Vport Config Utility.................................................................................................... 420
Windows Script........................................................................................................... 421
Linux Script ................................................................................................................ 422
Vport Configuration.................................................................................................... 423

Troubleshooting the DAPserver™ ................................................................................. 424

Firmware..................................................................................................................... 425
VPort........................................................................................................................... 426
DAPserver™............................................................................................................... 431

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 8

Introduction The DAPserver™ is an embedded device with versatile processing
to power, integrated network technology and advanced applications. The
DAPserver™ DAPserver™ is a reliable and efficient system that integrates substation
devices and industrial controllers. Not only does the DAPserver™ save
on the cost of operation and maintenance activities, but also provides a
truly open migration platform for ongoing advanced application
upgrades.

Product The DAPserver™ provides:

Features • Embedded Linux Real-time Operating System.
• Fanless CPU and no rotational or moving machine parts.
• A hardware watchdog and components for on-line diagnosis and
self restarting.
• Built-in real-time database to support the distribution of data for
multiple users through a TCP/IP network.
• Provides network safety and manages network application
services (i.e. Firewall, and Network Router).
• Built-in application servers, including FTP, SQL and a Web
Server.
• The ability to view real-time data using simple Web browsers.

Functionality The DAPserver™ supports the following functions:

• SCADA Protocol Conversion - The DAPserver™ provides
protocol conversion services to SCADA communication. This
allows flexibility in the selection of the device within the
substation without the restriction of the protocol that the device
uses. In addition, the DAPserver™ is built upon a flexible
platform, which allows new protocols and custom protocols to be
implemented with ease.
• Data Concentration - The DAPserver™ has the ability to
concentrate data from a wide range of substation devices. The
data is collected within the DAPserver™’s real-time database
and is available to applications such as multiple SCADA master
or sub-master stations, a local HMI or other substation devices.
The DAPserver™ can perform complex calculations and logical
operations on the data before it is sent to data consumers.
• Virtual Access to Remote Devices - Once configured, the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 9

 DAPserver™ provides a virtual communication pathway between
a computer and a remote device. By using the DAPserver™’s
Virtual Access feature with a remote device’s proprietary
software (which is provided by the manufacturer of the remote
device), all functionalities of the remote device may be accessed
and used.
• Remote Maintenance and Diagnostics - The DAPserver™’s
embedded Virtual Access technology provides remote
maintenance and diagnostics for the remote device. This allows
users at the office to perform a preliminary analysis of the state
and condition of substation equipment before traveling to the
substation.
• Integrated Web Server - The DAPserver™ contains a built-in
Web Server, which provides flexibility in data display and
communication with the DAPserver™ at a remote location. The
DAPserver™ employs open platform technology such as Apache
HTTP Server, PHP as the middleware and MySQL back end.
These platforms can be upgraded or customized to suit individual
needs.
• Programmable Logic Control - The DAPserver™ can perform
programmable logic control, which may be event-driven or
performed on a periodic basis.
• Protocol Analyzer - The DAPStudio software utility provides a
protocol analyzer feature in which communication between
remote devices and the DAPserver™ may be analyzed. The
DAPserver™ protocol analyzer provides a command line
interface through which messages can be sent to debug the
communication channel. The DAPserver™ protocol analyzer
displays filtered messages that contain timing and other relevant
information. The DAPserver™ also facilitates effective
communication monitoring between devices.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 10

Overview
The DAPserver™ communication functionality is flexible, capable of
accommodating differing technologies. A wide range of communication
protocols are supported; including legacy (e.g. SC1801), vendor
specific (e.g. SPA-Bus), defacto standards (e.g. Modbus) and open
standards (e.g IEC® 60870-5-101). The DAPserver™ communication
protocols support traditional Client/Server applications and a third
mode, monitoring.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 11

Client Applications
Client A DAPserver™ Client application usually initiates communication with a
Application lower order device like an IED or Communications Processor, as shown
in Figure 1-1. The DAPserver™ Client application must also be capable
of processing messages initiated by the lower order device.

Figure 1-1: DAPserver™ Client Application

Multiple Remote device communication reliability can be improved using a

Channel redundant communication channel. Each Client Application can be
Support configured to use a second, alternate, communication channel. This
feature requires the remote device to provide two communication ports
with the Client Application communication protocol.

Figure 1-2: Multiple Client Channels

The DAPserver™ Client redundancy is very flexible, capable of

accommodating different communication infrastructures. For example,
the primary communication could use DNP 3/TCP/IP while the
secondary could use dial up DNP 3 serial.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 12

Server Applications
Server The DAPserver™ server application provides the opposing function in a
Application Client/Server pair. For most communication protocols the DAPserver™
server application responds to requests and commands initiated by the
external Client. A Master station in a Control Center, see Figure 1-3 is
an example of an external Client that typically initiates communication
with the DAPserver™ server application.

Figure 1-3: DAPserver™ Server Application

Some advanced communication protocols may require the Server
application to initiate communications. Unsolicited exception reporting is
an example of a DAPserver™ Server Application initiating
communication.

Multiple Server communication reliability can be improved using multiple

Channel communication channels. Each Server Application can be configured to
Support use up to three alternate communication channels. Only one
communication channel can be active at a time, the remote master is
responsible for coordinating communication access.

Figure 1-4: Multiple Server Channels

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 13

 Multi-Host For each Server communication protocol the DAPserver™ server
Support supports simultaneous connections to one or more Hosts. A maximum
of 10 host connections can be defined, each with a unique database

Figure 1-5: Multiple Hosts

Monitor Applications
Monitor The third communication protocol application enables the DAPserver™
Application to monitor communication between devices. Figure 1-6 shows an
example where the DAPserver™ monitors the communication between
a Control Center and lower order device. The DAPserver™ can log in
the real-time database, and transfer information; for example,
measurements, breaker positions, and energy.

Figure 1-6: DAPserver™ Monitoring Application

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 14

VPort Applications
VPort Virtual Port (hereafter called VPort) is a port router function provided
Application by the DAPserver™. This feature provides the ability to connect a local
personal computer to a remote device through a TCP/IP Network and
the DAPserver™.

Figure 1-7: Virtual Port

By assigning one or more serial ports, to VPort channels on the

DAPserver™, a remote user can set up the virtual serial communication
connection with a remote device. The overall effect is the same as a
connection from a local personal computer directly to a remote device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 15

Installing DAPstudio™
General The following is a step-by-step instruction for installing the DAPstudio™
software.

1. Place the DAPstudio™ software into the Compact Disc drive of

your computer.

2. Go into My Computer directory and open the Compact Disc

directory. Here you should be able to see all the software’s files.

3. Left-click twice on the executable file named setup.exe. The

DAPstudio™ installation will start and the screen shown in Figure
1-8 will be displayed on your monitor.

Figure 1-8: Introductory

4. Left-click the “Next” button and the screen in Figure 1-9 should then
be displayed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 16

 Figure 1-9: License Agreement
5. Select the “I accept the terms in the License Agreement” option,
and left-click the “Next” button. Figure 1-10 should appear on the
monitor.

Figure 1-10: Register Screen

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 17

 6. Left-click the “Next” button, the screen in Figure 1-11 should then
be displayed.

Figure 1-11: Select Setup Type

7. Select the setup location you want, it is recommended that you
select the default location. Left-click the “Next” button, this will take
you to the screen in Figure 1-12.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 18

 Figure 1-12: Begin Installation
8. Left-click the “Install” button, and wait until the software finishes
installing. The screen in Figure 1-13 will appear after the software
finishes installing.

Figure 1-13: Finish Screen

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 19

 9. Left-click the “Finish” button. DAPstudio™ is now installed onto
your computer.

First Time Connection with the DAPserver™

General The following is a step-by-step instruction for establishing the first time
connection with the DAPserver™device.
1. Physically connect the DAPserver™ to your personal computer by
using a crossover Ethernet cable. Consult appendix 1 thru 3 of the
DAP Quickstart Guide for Ethernet port connection details.
2. Update your computer’s IP address to communicate with the
DAPserver™. The following are instructions on how you can update
your computer’s IP address.
a) Access the Network Connections from the Start menu.

Figure 1-14: Start Menu

b) Right-click on the connection you are using to connect to the
DAPserver™, and select the “Properties” option.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 20

 Figure 1-15: LAN Connection
c) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and left-click the “Properties”
button.

Figure 1-16: Internet Protocol

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 21

 d) Type in your computer’s IP address in the IP address input field.
Insure the IP address is on the same subnet as the
DAPserver™ Ethernet port your computer is connected to.
Subnet mask will automatically be set to a default value when
you left-click on the allocated input field. Left-click the “OK”
button to close the Internet Protocol Properties window.

Figure 1-17: Internet Protocol Properties

e) Left-click on the “Close” button on the Local Area Connection
window. The IP address for your computer has now been
updated.
f) Verify that you are connected to the DAPserver™ by opening
the Command window. In the Start menu, left-click on “Run”
option.
g) Type in cmd in the Run window.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 22

 Figure 1-18: Run Window
h) In the Command window, type in ping and then the
DAPserver™’s IP address. Press the e key. If you are properly
connected to the DAPserver™ you will get several responses.

Figure 1-19: Pinging the DAPserver™

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 23

Creating a New Project
General To create a new project in DAPstudio™, the following steps needs to be
taken.
1. Open DAPstudio™, by using the Start menu. The Open Project
window shown in Figure 1-20 will be displayed.

Figure 1-20: Open Project

2. Select “Local Project” and then left-click on the “Next” button. The
Project Manager window shown in Figure 1-21 will be displayed.
Note that the “demo” project is included by default as a sample
project configuration when the DAPstudio™, software package is
installed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 24

 Figure 1-21: Project Manage
3. Left-click on the “New…” button. Figure 1-22 shows the Create New
Project window, which will be displayed.

Figure 1-22: Create New Project

4. Type in the name of your project into the Name input field. The
Description parameter is optional. Select the folder you want your
project to be built in by left clicking the button. When you are
done selecting the appropriate folder, left-click the “OK” button. This
will take you back to the Project Manager window. Observe that the
project you just created is now displayed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 25

 NOTE: DAPstudio™, requires each project to be saved inside a
separate folder. It is recommended to set up a main root folder for
DAPstudio™ projects, and save individual project folders within the
main folder.
5. Select the project you have just created by left clicking on the
project’s icon. Left-click the “Finish” button, which will take you to
the User Login window. The User Login window is shown in Figure
1-23. Use the default password “admin” to login.

Figure 1-23: User Login

6. Left-click the “OK” button, this will take you to the Main
DAPstudio™, window. The Main DAPstudio™, window is shown
below in Figure 1-24. If the communication is going on between the
computer and DAP™ you should be able to see a message
indicating that CPU A is online in the Event Window. The CPU A
icon in the Channel Status window should also be blinking to
indicate the ongoing communication between the computer and
DAPstudio™.

Figure 1-24: Main DAPStudio

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 26

Changing IP Addresses
General The following is a step-by-step instruction on how to change the IP
addresses of the DAPserver™’s Ethernet ports.
1. In the Main DAPstudio™, window, left-click twice on the “Device
Information” icon. The Device Information System Management
window will appear on the left side of the screen, which is shown in
Figure 1-25.

Figure 1-25: Device Information

2. Left-click on the “System Port”, your DAPstudio™, workspace
should now contain the table shown in Figure 1-26.

Figure 1-26: System Port

3. Change the CPU A Address to the new IP address for the
DAPstudio™, Configuration Port, DAPviewer™ Port, Redundant
Service Port, and VT100 Console Port (TCP) parameters. The IP
address you enter will be the new IP address of the Ethernet port
your computer is currently connected to.

4. Left-click on the button at the top-left of the screen to save the

changes made.
5. Download the current project. Refer to the Download Project
section of the manual for detailed procedures. After downloading is
complete, the communication to the DAPserver™ will turn offline.
6. From Main DAPstudio™, window, pull down the System menu by
left clicking on “System” at the top of the screen.
7. Left-click on the “Configure IP Address” option from the System

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 27

 pull-down menu.
8. Login and left-click the “OK” button. The IP Configuration window
will appear which is shown in Figure 1-27.

Figure 1-27: Connect to Device

9. In the IP Address input field, type in the old IP address of the
Ethernet port your computer is connected to.
0. Left-click the “Connect” button, the Network IP Setting window that
is shown in Figure 1-28.

Figure 1-28: Network IP Setting

11. Left-click twice anywhere on the row of the Ethernet port you want
to configure. The Change IP Address window, shown in Figure 1-29
will open.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 28

 Figure 1-29: Change IP Address
12. In the IP Address input field, type in the new IP address for the
Ethernet port you have selected. If required, change the Mask and
Gateway; otherwise, keep the default values. Ensure to check mark
the Active IP parameter. Left-click the “OK” button.
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 to change the IP address for other
Ethernet ports. If your DAPserver™, has only three Ethernet ports,
make sure to uncheck the Active IP for Eth3 and Eth4.
14. Left-click the “Download” button in the Network IP Setting window
to download the configuration. The IP Configuration window will
appear which is shown in Figure 1-30 below.

Figure 1-30: Connect to CPU

15. In the IP Address input field, type in the old IP address of the
Ethernet port your computer is connected to. Left-click on the “OK”
button. A pop up message will appear asking to restart the
DAPserver™, Left-click the “No” button, because the
communication is currently offline and will not be able to restart the
DAPserver™,.
16. Left-click the “Save” button and then left-click the “Exit” button, to

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 29

 close the Network IP Setting window.
17. Manually reboot the DAPserver™,. The communication should then
turn online. If not, select the “Connect” option in the Tools menu,
which will turn the communication online.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 30

Updating the DAP Server Firmware
General The following is a step-by-step instruction on how you can update the
firmware in DAPstudio™.
WARNING: The DAPserver™ firmware is loaded unto the device at the
factory, and it should not be required to be re-loaded unless specifically
indicated by ASAT personnel. In the rare occasion when such firmware
update is necessary, the following procedure should be followed very
carefully, as any failure to upload and install the appropriate firmware
on DAPstudio™ properly will result in erratic operation and
malfunctioning of the device.
1. Before updating the firmware, the watch dog needs to be disabled.
In the Main DAPstudio™ window, left-click twice on the “Device
Information” icon. Left-click on “Properties” in the System
Management window.

Figure 1-31: Device Properties

2. The Property window shown in Figure 1-32 should appear on the
right hand side of the screen.

Figure 1-32: Property Window

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 31

 3. Left-click on “Watch Dog” in the Property window. A little down
arrow should appear beside “Enable”. Left-click on the down arrow.
A small list should appear, displaying the “Enable” and “Disable”
options. Left-click on the “Disable” option, to disable the Watch
Dog.

Figure 1-33: Watch Dog

4. Left-click on the button at the top of the screen to save the

changes made. Download the configuration to the DAPserver™;
the watch dog is now disabled.
5. Using the Tools pull-down menu, select the “Update Firmware”
option.

Figure 1-34: Tools Menu

6. The DAP™ Firmware Update window will appear which is shown in

Figure 1-35.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 32

 Figure 1-35: Firmware Update
7. Type in the DAPserver™’s IP address into the Device IP input field.
Enter the User Name and Password. Left-click the “Download”
button and DAPstudio™ will begin to download the firmware.
9. Wait until the Firmware download finishes, then left-click on the
“OK” button to close the DAP™ Firmware Update window. Manually
reboot the DAPserver™.
10. Enable the watch dog, save and download the project to the
DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 33

Overview
DAPstudio™ is the software utility used to:
• Retrieve information and send commands to remote devices.
• Instruct Server communication protocols to report data and
accept commands with remote Clients.
• Define Virtual Port communications for remote maintenance and
diagnostics using the device manufacturer software.
• Monitor the communication between two devices.
• Develop custom logic using the internal and remote device I/O.
• Enable access and create custom displays for the web based
HMI.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 34

Layout
Main Window
Main When DAPstudio™ is first started, DAPstudio™ will display the Main
Window window, which is shown in Figure 2-1. Each icon in the Main window
provides access to a DAPserver™application. Left-click twice on an
icon to activate a DAPserver™application.

Figure 2-1: DAPStudio Main Window

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 35

Layout Window
Overview The Layout window is displayed whenever an application is selected
from the Main window.

System The System Management provides simple navigation to the major

Management configuration groups plus an organized and hierarchical view of the
settings within the DAPserver™device. The System Management
window, for the Client Application, is highlighted in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2: System Management Window

The System Management window for the Client application provides
hierarchal access to the communication channels configured for Client
communication protocols.

Main The Main Workspace is used to configure protocol related point and
Workspace parameter information.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 36

 Figure 2-3: DAPstudio™ Main Workspace

The Main Workspace windows for the various applications are

discussed in subsequent sections of this document.

Property The Property window is used to configure the DAPserver™system or

Window communication parameters. Communication parameters such as baud
rate and flow control, and internal protocol-specific parameters, such as
the device address, are set within this area of the window. The Property
window for the DNP 3 Client Protocol Parameters is highlighted in
Figure 2-4.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 37

 Figure 2-4: DAPstudio™ Property Window
The Property windows for the various applications are discussed in
subsequent sections of this document.

Event The Event window is maintained whenever DAPstudio™ is connected

Window to a DAPserver™. This window shows timely information regarding the
status of the system and, if configured, SOE information. The
DAPstudio™ Event window is highlighted in Figure 2-5.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 38

 Figure 2-5: DAPstudio™ Event Window

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 39

Main Menu and Toolbar
Overview
The DAPstudio™ Main Menu and Toolbar are shown in Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6: Main Menu and Toolbar

Left clicking on any item on the Main Menu, will activate a sub menu
with additional selections.

File Menu
Overview Selecting the “File” option will display the File sub menu shown in
Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7: File Menu

New Project Selecting the “New Project” option will display the Create New Project
window shown in Figure 2-8. New DAPstudio™ projects are defined
using this menu option.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 40

 Figure 2-8: Create New Project

Open Project This menu option is used to open an existing DAPstudio™ project.
DAPstudio™ will first prompt you to close the active project.

Figure 2-9: Close Project Prompt

Left-click the “OK” button. DAPstudio™ will then prompt you to save
your changes. Left-click the “Yes” button to save your current project.

Figure 2-10: Save Changes

Next, DAPstudio™ will prompt you for the location of the project you
want to activate. Select the “Local Project” option, and left-click the
“Next” button.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 41

 Figure 2-11: Local Project Selection
DAPstudio™ will display the available projects, as shown in Figure
2-12. Left-click on the icon of the project you want to open.

Figure 2-12: Available Projects

Open the selected project by left clicking the “Finish” button.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 42

 DAPstudio™ will ask you to confirm your access rights if you did not
enter it earlier. (default User and Password is “admin”)

Figure 2-13: Login

After logging in, the selected project will be loaded into DAPstudio™.

Close Selecting this menu option will close the currently open project.
Project DAPstudio™ prompts for confirmation before closing the project.

Figure 2-14: Close Project

Save
This option saves the current project to disk. The button on the
Toolbar provides the same functionality as the “Save” option.
It is a recommended practice to periodically save to disk during
the development of a project.

Exit Selecting this menu option will close the current project and exit
DAPstudio™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 43

Tools Menu
Overview From the DAPstudio™ Main window, the Tools menu can be accessed
by left clicking on the “Tools” option on the DAPstudio™ menu bar. The
Tools menu is shown in Figure

Figure 2-15: Tools Menu

The following sections will provide details of the options available in the
Tools menu.

Connect
Overview Choosing this option allows you to connect to a DAPserver™ through
the Connect to device window shown in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16: Connect to device window

The parameters which are required to be configured within this window
are:
IP Address This is the IP address of the DAPserver™ to which you wish to connect.
Verify that the displayed IP address is correct. If no, type in the correct
IP address.
Port This is the port number configured for DAPstudio™ Configuration Port
under Device Information. Verify that this value is the correct value, as
well.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 44

 After verifying the correctness of these parameters, left-click on the
Connect button to connect to the DAPserver™.

SCP Configuration
Overview The SCP Configuration option, as seen in Figure 2-17, allows you to
configure the SCP related parameters and options. These parameters
are used in downloading of the configuration and updating the firmware
processes.

Figure 2-17: SCP Configuration window

The parameters which are required to be configured within this window
are:
SCP Port This is the default SCP Port used by DAPserver™.

After configuring all the desired parameters and options, left-click on the
Save button to finish.

Download
Overview The Download option is used to download the current project
configuration to the connected DAPserver™.
For the step-by-step procedure on how to use this option, please refer
to the section Downloading a Project under DAPstudio™ Projects in this
manual.

Switch Current Configuration

Overview Using the Switch Current Configuration option activates a different
Memory Zone in the DAPserver™.
The following is a step-by-step instruction on how to use the Switch
Current Configuration option.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 45

 1. From the Tools menu, left-click the “Switch Current Configuration”
option. The Connect to device window, similar to Figure 2-16, will
appear.

2. Verify the IP Address is the DAPserver™’s IP address and the Port

number is correct, then left-click the “Connect” button.

3. The Switch Configuration window, shown in Figure 2-18 will open.

Select the Memory Zone you want to use and left-click the “OK”
button.

Figure 2-18: Switch Configuration window

4. A message indicating the successful switch to the chosen

configuration number will pop up, and ask whether you want to
restart the device or not. Left-click on yes to restart the device, and
no to abort the reboot.

Update Firmware
Overview The Update Firmware option is used to perform a firmware update in
the DAPserver™.
For the step-by-step procedure on how to use this option, please refer
to Updating DAP™ Firmware in the Introduction section of this manual.

Modify Date and Time

Overview Using the “Modify Date and Time” option, you can synchronize the
DAPserver™’a date and time with PC’s date and time.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 46

 Figure 2-19: Connect to device window
When the “Modify Date and Time” option is selected, a message similar
to the one show in Figure 2-19 will appear, indicating that the
DAPserver™ has been time synchronized successfully. Left-click the
“OK” button.
You can verify that DAPserver™’s date and time is the same as your
PC’s by accessing the Device Information window. Left-click on
“Pseudo Points” in the System Management window, and left-click on
the “Value” tab.

Clear All Historic DB / Clear Historic Trending

The “Clear All Historic DB” and “Clear Historic Trending” options allow
you to clear out some room on DAPserver™’s memory by deleting the
historical database tables and trending information.

After choosing these options, no indication messages will be shown in

DAPstudio™. The easiest way to check to see whether the actions
were executed properly is to access the DAPstudio™ database through
the command window and Telnet session and confirm that the historical
database tables or the historical trending information have been
successfully deleted.

System Menu
Overview From the DAPstudio™ Main window, the System menu can be
accessed by left clicking on the “System” option on the DAPstudio™
menu bar. The System menu is shown in Figure 2-20.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 47

 Figure 2-20: System Menu
The following sections will provide details of the options available in the
System menu.

Configure IP Address
IP Address The “Configure IP Address” option allows you to configure the IP
address of the Ethernet ports on the DAPserver™. The following is a
step-by-step instruction on how to configure these IP addresses.

1. In the DAPstudio™ Main window, left-click twice on the “Device

Information” icon. A list of different objects will appear in the System
Management window.

2. Left-click twice on “System Port”, the System Port table should

appear this is shown in Figure 2-21.

Figure 2-21: System Port

3. Change the CPU A Address to the new IP address for the

DAPstudio™ Configuration Port, DAPviewer™ Service Port,

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 48

 Standby Service Port, and VT100 Console Port (TCP). The IP
address you enter will be the new IP address of the Ethernet port
your computer is currently connected to.

4. Left-click on the icon at the top-left of the screen to save the

changes made.

5. Download the current project. Refer to the Download Project

section of the manual for detailed instructions. After downloading is
complete, the communication to the DAPserver™ will turn offline.

6. In the DAPserver™ Main window, using the System pull-down

menu, select the “Configure IP Address” option.

7. This will display the IP Configuration window, which is shown in

Figure 2-22.

Figure 2-22: IP Configuration

8. In the IP Address input field, type in the old IP address of the

Ethernet port your computer is connected to.

9. Left-click the “Connect” button. The Network IP Setting window will

pop up and should look like the window in Figure 2-23.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 49

 Figure 2-23: Network IP Setting

10. Left-click twice anywhere on the row of the Ethernet port you want
to configure. The Change IP Address window, shown in Figure 2-24
will open.

Figure 2-24: Change IP Address

11. In the IP Address input field, type in the new IP address for the
Ethernet port you selected. If required, change the Mask and
Gateway; otherwise, keep these parameters the same. Ensure to

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 50

 check mark the Active IP parameter. Left-click the “OK” button.

12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 to change the IP address for other

Ethernet ports. If your DAPserver™ has only three Ethernet ports,
make sure to uncheck the Active IP for Eth3 and Eth4.

13. Left-click the “Download” button in the Network IP Setting window

to download the configuration. The IP Configuration window will
appear, and is shown in Figure 2-25 below.

Figure 2-25: IP Configuration

14. In the IP Address input field, type in the old IP address of the
Ethernet port your computer is connected to. Left-click the “OK”
button. A pop up message will appear asking to restart the
DAPserver™. Left-click the “No” button, because the
communication is currently offline and will not be able to restart the
DAPserver™.

15. Left-click the “Save” button. Left-click the “Exit” button. This will
close the Network IP Setting window.

16. Manually reset the DAPserver™. The communication should then

turn online. If not, select the “Connect” option in the Tools menu,
which will turn the communication online.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 51

Configure IP Table
Overview The “Configure IP Table” option allows you to define the IP addresses
of computers and devices that can access the DAPserver™. The IP
Table increases the system’s security by prohibiting non-authorized
users from accessing the DAPserver™. For better understanding, refer
to Figure 2-26, which illustrates the IP Table concept.
PC1 PC2 PC3
192.168.0.208 192.168.0.128 192.168.0.171

Eth0
192.168.0.189

Eth0 IP Table
192.168.0.208
192.168.0.128

Figure 2-26: IP Table Concept

In Figure 2-26, there are three computers connected to Eth 0 (the first
Ethernet port) of the DAPserver™. For Eth 0, the DAPserver™ IP Table
allows access for the devices (PC1 and PC2) with IP address
192.168.0.128 and 192.168.0.208. The IP address 192.168.0.171 is
blocked; therefore, PC3 cannot access the DAPserver™.

Add IP The following is a step-by-step instruction to add new IP addresses to

Address the IP Table.

1. From the System menu, left-click the “Configure IP Table” option.

The Configure Wizard window, shown in Figure 2-27 will appear.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 52

 Figure 2-27: Configure Wizard
The “Upload and Configure” option is applicable while a server™ is
connected to the personal computer running DAPstudio™.
Selecting the “Upload and Configure” option will instruct
DAPstudio™ to retrieve the IP Table addresses from the
DAPserver™.
The “Local Configure” option must be used when the DAPserver™
is not connected to the personal computer running DAPstudio™.
This option is also available while the DAPserver™ is connected to
the personal computer running DAPstudio™. Selecting the “Local
Configure” option will instruct DAPstudio™ to check the active
project for previously saved IP Table addresses. When available,
previously saved IP Table addresses are loaded into DAPstudio™.
DAPstudio™ will reset the IP Table whenever a previously saved
table is not available.

2. Select the “Local Configure” option and left-click the “Next” button.
The Configure IP Table window will appear and is shown in Figure
2-28.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 53

 Figure 2-28: Configure IP Table

3. Using the Interface pull-down menu, select the Ethernet port that
requires configuration. In the IP Address input field type in an IP
address of a computer or a device permitted to access the
DAPserver™, using the specified Ethernet port.

4. In the TCP section, check the appropriate protocol(s), system(s),

and application(s) used by the computer or device. In the Other
input field, type in other port numbers required by the computer or
device. When typing the port numbers, the port numbers can be
separated by a forward slash. For example, 1900/1890.

5. In the UDP section, check the appropriate protocol(s) used by the

computer or device. In the Other input field, type in other port
numbers required by the computer or device. When typing the port
numbers, the port numbers can be separated by a forward slash.

6. Left-click the “Add/Modify” button. Notice the IP address will be

added to the IP Table.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 54

 7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 to add IP addresses of additional
computers and devices for the current Ethernet port.

Remember to add the IP address of the current computer

accessing the DAPserver™, this will ensure you will not be
locked out of the DAPserver™.

8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to configure other Ethernet ports.

9. Left-click the “Next” button. The Download Configuration window

will appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

Figure 2-29: Configure Download

10. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the
DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

11. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window shown in
Figure 2-30 will let you know the download was successful. Left-

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 55

 click the “OK” button to close the pop up window.

Figure 2-30: Download Successful

Modify IP The following is a step-by-step instruction to modify the existing IP

Address addresses in the IP Table.

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Add IP Address instruction.

2. In the Configure IP Table window, left-click twice on the interface of

the IP address you want to modify. The TCP and UDP sections will
have the current characteristics of the IP address check marked.
Modify the characteristics by checking additional characteristics or
un-checking the existing characteristics. Once finished, left-click the
“Add/Modify” button.

3. Repeat Step 2 if other IP addresses need to be modified.

4. Left-click the “Next” button. The Download Configuration window

will appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

5. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

6. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window shown in

Figure 2-30 will let you know the download was successful. Left-
click the “OK” button to close the pop up window.

Delete IP The following is a step-by-step instruction to delete existing IP

Address addresses in the IP Table.

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Add IP Address instruction.

2. In the Configure IP Table window, left-click twice on the interface of

the IP address you want to delete. Left-click the “Delete” button. A
pop up window similar to Figure 2-31 will appear, asking for you for
confirmation.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 56

 Figure 2-31: Delete IP Table Item Confirmation

3. Left-click the “Yes” button. The IP address will be removed from the
IP Table.

4. Repeat Steps 2 through 3 to delete additional IP addresses.

5. Left-click the “Next” button. The Download Configuration window

will appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

6. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

7. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window shown in

Figure 2- will let you know the download was successful. Left-click
the “OK” button to close the pop up window.

Removing the IP addresses in DAPstudio™ does not

immediately disable access in the DAPserver™. The IP
addresses are active until the DAPstudio™ project has been
successfully downloaded to the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 57

Configure Router
Overview The “Configure Router” option allows computers and devices from one
network to access other computers and devices on other networks
through the DAPserver™. Figure 2-32 illustrates the router concept.
Each Ethernet port on the DAPserver™ can provide a route to a
network. Enabling route forwarding allows DAPserver™ to pass
network traffic from any given physical network port through to any
other physical network port attached to DAPserver™. Also, by adding
extra network gateway entries in the route table, it is possible to forward
network traffic to additional external routers.
Network 1 Network 2
PC1 PC2
192.168.0.208 Regardless of different 192.168.1.128
networks, PC1 and PC2
can access each other by
using the Router function

Eth0 Eth1
192.168.0.189 192.168.1.189

Figure 2-32: Router Concept

Add Route The following is a step-by-step instruction on how to add routes to the
Router Table.

1. From the System menu, left-click the “Configure Router” option.

The Configure Router Wizard window, similar to Figure 2-27 will
appear.

2. Select the “Local Configure” option and left-click the “Next” button.
The Configure Router window, shown in Figure 2-33 will be
displayed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 58

 Figure 2-33: Configure Router

Network IP When configuring a route for the DAPserver™, you

must consider the network the Ethernet port is
connected to. For example, Eth0 with a default IP
address of 192.168.0.189 can have access to all
computers and devices with IP address that starts
with 192.168.0.xxx. Each network has a network IP
address. For the network that contains computers and
devices with IP address that starts with 192.168.0.xxx,
the network IP address is 192.168.0.0.

Mask When configuring a route for the DAPserver™, you

must consider the network the Ethernet port is
connected to. For example, Eth0 with a default IP
address of 192.168.0.189 can have access to all
computers and devices with IP address that starts
with 192.168.0.xxx. In order to filter access to certain
computers and devices from Eth0, a Subnet mask is
used. To create a route to a network of computers
and devices with IP address that starts with
192.168.0.xxx a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 is used.

Gateway Gateway acts as an entrance to a network. When the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 59

 DAPserver™ is routing networks, the DAPserver™’s
Ethernet ports are the networks’ gateways. Adding
additional external gateway's IP Address information
to the DAPserver™ router table allows those networks
to participate in being forwarded through
DAPserver™.

3. Using the pull-down menu for the Interface property, select the
DAPserver™ Ethernet port that requires routing.

4. In the Network input field, type in the IP address of the network you
want the Ethernet port to connect to. In most cases for Eth0, the
network IP address is 192.168.0.0. For Eth1, the network IP
address is 192.168.1.0, and so on.

5. In the Mask input field, type in the Netmask for the Ethernet port.
Usually the Netmask is 255.255.255.0 which groups all computers
and devices with IP address that starts with 192.168.0.xxx as a
single network connected to Eth0. For Eth1, the Netmask will group
all computers and devices with 192.168.1.xxx as a network, and so
on.

6. In the Default Gateway input field, type in the IP address of the

Ethernet port. For example, the default IP address of Eth0 is
192.168.0.189. You can also leave the Default Gateway empty and
DAPstudio™ will automatically use the address 0.0.0.0, which is
reserved for default gateways.

7. Left-click the “Add/Modify” button. The new route will be displayed

in the Route Table.

8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to add other routes for other Ethernet

ports.

9. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 60

 Figure 2-34: Download Configuration

10. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the
DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

11. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

Modify The following is a step-by-step instruction to modify the existing route in

Route the Route Table.

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Add Route instruction.

2. In the Route Table, left-click twice on the interface of the route that
requires modification.

3. Update the route’s Network, Mask and Default Gateway property by

typing in the appropriate input fields.

4. Left-click the “Add/Modify” button. A pop up message, similar to

Figure 2-35 will appear.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 61

 Figure 2-35: Route Modification Confirmation

5. Left-click the “Yes” button. Observe the changes made to the route
in the Route Table.

6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to modify other routes.

7. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

8. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

9. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

Delete Route The following is a step-by-step instruction to delete existing routes in

the Route Table.

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Add Route instruction.

2. In the Route Table, left-click twice on the interface of the route that
needs to be deleted. Left-click the “Delete” button. A pop up window
shown in Figure 2-36 will appear asking you for confirmation.

Figure 2-36: Delete Route Confirmation

3. Left-click the “Yes” button. The route will be removed from the
Route Table.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to delete other routes.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 62

 5. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will
appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

6. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

7. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

Application As previously mentioned, the router function can be used to access

another computer on a different network. The following is a step-by-step
instruction on how to do so using the router function.

1. Connect the two personal computers to the DAPserver™ as shown

in Figure 2-32. Open or create a DAPstudio™ project on PC1, and
download the project onto the DAPserver™.

2. Access the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window (Figure

2-37) for the PC1’s Ethernet port. In the Default Gateway input field,
type in the IP address of the DAPserver™ Ethernet port the PC1 is
connected to (Eth0).

Figure 2-37: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 63

 3. On PC2, upload the DAPstudio™ project from the DAPserver™.
Notice the communication connection to the DAPserver™ will be
offline.

4. Access the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window for the

PC2’s Ethernet port. In the Default Gateway input field type in the
IP address of the DAPserver™’s Ethernet port the PC2 is
connected to (Eth1). The communication connection to the
DAPserver™ from PC2 should now be online.

5. From either PC1 or PC2, access the Configure Router function in

DAPstudio™. Following the Add Route instruction, create two
routes, one for Eth0 and one for Eth1. The Route Table should look
similar to Figure 2-38. Download the Route table and reboot the
DAPserver™.

Figure 2-38: Configure Router Example

6. The two personal computers can now access each other. To test
this, from PC1 try to ping PC2 and vice versa.

Note The routing feature can be easily disabled by deselecting the checkbox
that allows IP network forwarding on DAPserver™, i.e., the Enable
Router box in the Configure Router Window.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 64

Configure PPP Server
Overview The “Configure PPP Server” option allows the DAPserver™ to work as
a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Server. The PPP Server is able to
create and run IP and other network protocols through a direct-
connecting serial link; for example, modem cable. Configuring the PPP
Server in DAPstudio™ allow you to set up and manage PPP Server on
the DAPserver™.

Add PPP The following is a step-by-step instruction on how to add a PPP Port.
Port

1. From the System menu, left-click the “Configure PPP Server”

option. The Configure Wizard window, similar to Figure 2-27 will
appear.

2. Select the “Local Configure” option and left-click the “Next” button.
The Configure PPP Server window will appear and is shown in
Figure 2-39 below.

Figure 2-39: Configure PPP Server

3. Using the pull-down menu for the Serial Port property, select the
serial port used to connect to the remote device.

4. In the Local Server IP input field, type in the IP address of the

DAPserver™.

5. In the Remote Client IP input field, type in the IP address you want

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 65

 the PPP Server to assign your personal computer.

6. Left-click the “Add/Modify” button. The PPP port will be displayed in

the Port Defined table.

7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 to define more PPP ports.

8. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

9. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

10. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

Modify PPP The following is a step-by-step instruction to modify the existing PPP
Port port.

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Add PPP Port instruction.

2. In the Port Defined Table, left-click twice on the Serial Port of the
PPP port that requires modification.

3. Update the port’s Local Server IP and Remote Client IP property by

typing in the appropriate input fields.

4. Left-click the “Add/Modify” button. A pop up message, similar to

Figure 2-40 will appear.

Figure 2-40: PPP Port Modification Confirmation

5. Left-click the “Yes” button. Observe the changes made to the PPP
port in the Port Defined table on the left of the Configure PPP
Server window.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 66

 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to modify other PPP ports.

7. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

8. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

9. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window shown will let
you know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button
to close the pop up window.

Delete PPP The following is a step-by-step instruction to delete existing PPP port.
Port

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Add PPP Port instruction.

2. In the Port Defined table, left-click twice on the Serial Port of the
PPP Port that needs to be deleted. Left-click the “Delete” button. A
pop up window shown in Figure 2-41 will appear asking you for
confirmation.

Figure 2-41: Delete Route Confirmation

3. Left-click the “Yes” button. The PPP port will be removed from the
Port Defined table.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to delete other PPP ports.

5. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

6. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 67

 7. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

Configure NTP
Overview Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the current
system’s time with a time server on the network. The “Configure NTP”
option allows you to configure the DAPserver™ to be either an NTP
Client, NTP Server or both. For better understanding, refer to Figure
2-42, which illustrates the NTP concept. Additional information can also
be obtained from the NTP section of the manual.

Figure 2-42: NTP Concept

Client Mode The DAPserver™ uses the NTP Client to time synchronize itself from
an external time source. In Figure 2-43, the DAPserver™ is time
synchronized via a GPS clock. The GPS clock NTP Server provides the
time synchronization information to the DAPserver™ NTP Client.

Figure 2-43: NTP Client

The following is a step-by-step instruction to configure the DAPserver™
as an NTP Client.

5. From the System menu, left-click the “Configure NTP” option. The

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 68

 Configure Wizard window will appear.

6. Select the “Local Configure” option and left-click the “Next” button.
The Configure NTP window will appear and is shown in Figure 2-44
below. Notice that the NTP is disabled by default.

Figure 2-44: Configure NTP

7. Select the “Client” option. The Configure NTP window will

automatically change to the Client NTP window shown in Figure
2-45.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 69

 Figure 2-45: Client NTP

8. Type in the primary time server IP address into the Primary NTP
Server IP input field. Primary time server can either be a GPS
clock, personal computer, another DAPserver™ or the Internet.

9. Type in the secondary time server IP address into the Secondary

NTP Server IP input field. Secondary time server can either be a
GPS clock, personal computer, another DAPserver™ or the
Internet. Leave this field blank when a secondary time server is not
being used.

10. Type in the update period (in minutes) into the Update Frequency
input field.

11. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will
appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

12. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the
DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

13. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 70

Server Mode The DAPserver™ uses the NTP Server to time synchronize external
devices, acting as an external clock source to the external devices. In
Figure 2-46, the protection relay is time synchronized by the
DAPserver™. The DAPserver™ NTP Server provides the time
synchronization information to the protection relay NTP Client.

Figure 2-46: NTP Server

The following is a step-by-step instruction to configure the DAPserver™
as an NTP Server.

1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 from the Client Mode instruction.

2. Select the “Server” option. The Configure NTP window will

automatically change to the Server NTP window shown in Figure
2-47.

Figure 2-47: Server NTP

3. Type in the primary time server IP address into the Primary NTP
Server IP input field if the DAPserver™ is to acquire the time from
an external source. Primary time server can either be a GPS clock,
personal computer, another DAPserver™ or the Internet. If the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 71

 DAPserver™ is the source for the time, leave this field blank.

Type in the secondary time server IP address into the Secondary

NTP Server IP input field. Secondary time server can either be a
GPS clock, personal computer, another DAPserver™ or the
Internet. Leave this field blank when a secondary time server is not
being used or if the DAPserver™ is the source for the time and
does not require an external source.

4. Check the Ethernet port(s) of the DAPserver™ that will be

connected to NTP Clients. For example, in Figure 2-42, DAP 1 is an
NTP Server, and Eth1 is the Ethernet port connected to DAP 2,
DAP 3, and DAP 4, which are NTP Clients. Therefore, you should
only check Eth1.

5. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

6. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

7. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window shown in

Figure 2-30 will let you know the download was successful. Left-
click the “OK” button to close the pop up window.

Configure Time Zone

Time Zone The “Configure Time Zone” option allows you to set the current time
zone that the DAPserver™ belongs to. The following is a step-by-step
instruction to configure the DAPserver™’s time zone.

1. From the System menu, left-click the “Configure Time Zone” option.

2. Select the “Local Config” option and left-click the “Next” button. The
Configure Time Zone window will appear and is shown in Figure
2-48 below.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 72

 Figure 2-48: Configure Time Zone

3. Using the pull-down menu for the Time Zone property, select the
time zone the DAPserver™ belongs to.

4. Left-click the “Next” button. The Configure Download window will

appear, and is shown in Figure 2-29.

5. Ensure the IP Address property has the correct IP address of the

DAPserver™’s Ethernet port that the current computer is connected
to. Left-click the “Finish” button.

6. Log in and left-click the “OK” button. A pop up window will let you
know the download was successful. Left-click the “OK” button to
close the pop up window.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 73

User Login/Logout
User Login Using this option from the System Menu is only possible if the user has
logged out by selecting from the User Logout option from the same
menu. In other words, this option only becomes available once the user
has chosen to log out by clicking on the User Logout option.

In order to log in, left-click on the User Login option, and fill in the
Username and Password fields in the DAPstudio™ User Login window
that opens.

User Logout By left-clicking on this option, a logged in user will be logged out.

Note that when a user is logged in, the User Login option is grayed out.
The same is true about the User Logout option when the use is logged
out.

Reboot DAPserver™
It is possible to restart the DAPserver™ that is being used by the
project currently open in DAPstudio™ by left-clicking on this option.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 74

DAPstudio™ Projects
Overview This section describes the processes to download and upload a
DAPstudio™ project, to and from the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 75

Downloading a Project
General The following is a step-by-step instruction for downloading a
DAPstudio™ project to a DAPserver™.
1. In the Main DAPstudio™ window, pull-down the Tools menu by left
clicking on “Tools” at the top of the Main DAPstudio™ window.

Figure 2-50: Tools Menu

2. Left-click on the “Download” option. This will display the Download
Configuration window, which is shown in Figure 2-51.

Figure 2-51: Download Configuration

3. Type in the DAPserver™’s IP address into the IP Address input
field.
4. Left-click the “OK” button to download the project to the DAP
Server. After the download if finished, a message will pop up,
asking you if you would like to restart the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 76

 Figure 2-52: Restart DAP Server
5. Left-click the “Yes” button, in a few seconds the DAPserver™ will
reboot.

Uploading a Project
General The following is a step-by-step instruction for uploading a DAPstudio™
project.
1. In the Main DAPstudio™ window, pull-down the File menu by left
clicking on “File” at the top of the screen. Left-click “Open Project…”
option, as shown in Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53: File Menu

2. A message will appear, asking you if you would like to close the
current project. Left-click the “OK” button to confirm you want to
close the current project.

Figure 2-54: Close Current Project Message

3. The message shown in Figure 2-55 will appear, asking you if you
would like to save the changes you have made to the project.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 77

 Figure 2-55: Save Current Project Message
4. Left-click the “Yes” button to save the current project. The window
shown in Figure 2-56 will be displayed on your monitor.

Figure 2-56: Open Project

5. Select “Upload Project” and left-click on the “Next” button. The
Connect to CPU window shown in Figure 2-57 will be displayed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 78

 Figure 2-57: Connect to CPU
6. Enter the DAPserver™’s IP address into the IP address input field.

7. Left-click on the “Browse” button. A window similar to Figure 2-58,

will appear.

Figure 2-58: Select Project

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 79

 8. Left-click on the “New” button. The Create New Project window,
shown in Figure 2-59, will appear.

Figure 2-59: Create New Project

9. Enter the Name of your project and its Description into the allocated
space. Select the folder you want your project to be built in by left
clicking the button. When you are done selecting the folder, left-
click the “OK” button. This will take you back to the Project Manage
window. Observe that the project you just created is now displayed.

10. Select the project you have just created by left clicking on the
project’s icon. Left-click the “OK” button, this will take you back to
the Connect Setting window.
11. Left-click on the “Finish” button. The project will begin to upload.
Once the project is finished uploading, the User Login window will
be displayed.
12. Login and left-click on the “OK” button. This will open the uploaded
project, and the Main DAPstudio™ window of the project will be
displayed. Main DAPstudio™ window should look similar to the
window in Figure 2-60.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 80

 Figure 2-60: Main DAPstudio™Window

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 81

Device Information
Properties
Property The Properties window, shown in Figure 2-61, specifies the
Window DAPserver™ device information.

Figure 2-61: DAPserver™ Properties

Redundant This property enables or disables a redundant system. When enabled,

System two DAPserver™ devices use a TCP/IP connection or hardware switch
panel to form a redundant setup.

Max. Event This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Records

Max. Fault This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Records

Max. Days of This property specifies the maximum number of days recorded in the
Historic Data historical database. The valid range is 0 (disable historical recording) to
365 days with a default value of 1 year. The memory required for the
Historical trending buffer can be calculated using Equation 2-1.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 82

 Equation 2-1: Historical DB Buffer Size

Maximum This property specifies the maximum disk space used, in percentage,
Disk Space before a database clean up is performed. When this limit is reached, the
(%) system will delete the oldest record to free up some space. Refer to the
Used Disk Space pseudo point for the actual amount of disk usage in
percentage.

Records Per This property specifies the number of records, in percentage over the
Delete (%) total number of records, to be deleted per deletion operation, and it is
associated with the Maximum Disk Space property.

Watch Dog This property enables or disables the hardware watchdog. Normally this
property is enabled and should be temporarily disabled during a
firmware update.

Console This property specifies the hotkey used to access the VT100 console.
Hotkey The valid options are l, m, n, and o.

Logout This property specifies the console automatic logout timeout, in

Delay seconds, when no keyboard activity is detected. The valid range is 10 to
3600 seconds with a default setting of 300 seconds (5 minutes).

Model This property specifies the product model, which identifies the hardware
and firmware.

Time Sync. This property only applies to a redundant configuration and instructs the
Standby active CPU to time synchronizes the standby CPU.
CPU

RTDB Sync. This property only applies to a redundant configuration and instructs the
Period active CPU to periodically synchronize the real-time database with the
standby CPU. This period also specifies the period the active CPU time
synchronizes the standby CPU. The valid range is 0 (disable
synchronization) to 3600 minutes with a default setting of 10 minutes.

Timeout for In a redundant configuration the active CPU will monitor the
ALL IED communication with all of the IEDs. A switch over to the standby CPU
Offline will occur when communication is lost with all IEDs for the period of time
specified by this property. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds with a
default setting of 60 seconds.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 83

 The recommended setting is at least twice the minimum polling
timeout of all the IEDs.

Time In a redundant configuration, the standby CPU will monitor

Interval(s) communication between the active CPU and IEDs. When the active
for Monitor CPU is lost on the standby service port a switch over will occur when
Client the standby CPU does not detect any communication between the
Polling active CPU and IEDs for the period of time specified by this property.
The valid range is 0 (disable) to 3600 seconds with a default setting of
0.
This property is only applicable to RS-485 communication
connected in a loop, with each end terminated at a
DAPserver™ unit.

Time This property only applies to a redundant configuration, where, under

Interval(s) normal operation, the active CPU signals the standby CPU every 10
for Network milliseconds. When the standby CPU does not receive this signal for
Checking this period of time, the Standby will begin a switch over sequence. The
standby CPU will take over control if all of the switch criteria are met.

SubStation This property is used to specify the name of the substation.

Name

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 84

Pseudo Point
Overview The DAPserver™ maintains a set of internal data points (pseudo points)
for monitoring the system. These pseudo points, described in the
following sections, are full function I/O points, available to the
DAPserver™ applications; for example, Server, logic.

Basic Information
Property The System Pseudo Point Basic Information window and properties are
Window similar to the Client Application System Pseudo Point Basic Information
window.

Value
Property The System Pseudo Point Value window and properties are similar to
Window the Client Application System Pseudo Point Value window.

System Pseudo Points

Overview The following sections describe the default System pseudo points,
which are shown in Figure 2-62. These pseudo points are always
available.

Figure 2-62: System Pseudo Points

Date The current date of the DAPserver™.

Time The current time of the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 85

CPU Load This pseudo point reports the CPU loading as a percentage and is
updated every second.

Free memory This is the current available memory in kilobytes. The free memory is
updated every second.

Switch board This pseudo digital input reports the availability of hardware redundancy
status switching. This point is set when hard switching is not available.

CPU ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Alarm Notify This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Service

DAPstudio™ This pseudo point reports the current operational status of the
service DAPstudio™ module. The pseudo point will be:
• Cleared when the DAPstudior™ module is configured and
available.
• Set when an error has been detected and the DAPstudio™
module is not running.

VT100 This pseudo point reports the current operational status of the VT100
Console console database module. The pseudo point will be:
service • Cleared when the VT console is configured and available.
• Set when an error has been detected and the VT100 console
database module is not running.

Historic DB This pseudo point reports the current operational status of the historical
service database module. The pseudo point will be:
• Cleared when the historical database is configured and available.
• Set when an error has been detected and the historical database
module is not running.

DAPviewer™ This pseudo point reports the current operational status of the DAP
service Server DAPviewer™ module. The pseudo point will be:
• Cleared when DAPviewer™ is configured and available.
• Set when an error has been detected and the DAPviewer™
module is not running.

Redundant This pseudo point reports the current operational status of the
DAPserver™ redundancy module. The pseudo point will be:

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 86

service • Cleared when redundancy is configured and available.
• Set when an error has been detected and the redundancy
module is not running.

Running This pseudo point is only used for a redundant system and indicates
status which CPU is active (in control).

Partner CPU This pseudo point reports the operational status of the partner CPU.
Status The pseudo point can report:
• 0 – Off-line mode, the partner CPU cannot be found.
• 1 - Standby mode, the partner CPU is detected and is available
to become active (take control).
• 2 - Active mode, the partner CPU is detected and currently active
(in control).

Authority This pseudo point reflects the status of the security key, which is
key checked every 10 minutes. This pseudo digital input is asserted when a
valid security key is detected. When the security is missing this pseudo
point will be cleared and the DAPserver™ will restart every 2 hours.

Reboot This pseudo point is used to restart the device. For a redundant system,
Device both CPUs are restarted.

Switch This pseudo point is only applicable to a redundant system and is used
Device to remotely switch control to the standby CPU.

Used Disk This pseudo point is a representation of the amount of disk space used
Space (%) on the compact flash card (In percentage).

Last Login This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
User Name

Last Login IP This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Last Event This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Message

Current This pseudo point shows which configuration zone is currently being
Configuration used within the server.
Zone

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 87

CPU Load – This pseudo point represents the CPU load average per minute (In
Average percentage).
%/min

Firmware This pseudo point allows you to view the current firmware version of the
Version server that you are connected to.

Current User This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Name

Partner CPU Pseudo Points

Overview The Partner CPU pseudo points are used for redundant systems. These
pseudo points are a copy of the System pseudo point in the redundant
CPU.

Figure 2-63: Partner CPU Pseudo Points

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 88

System Port
Overview The System Port properties, shown in Figure 2-71, are common for the
DAPserver™ and used to define ports.

Figure 2-71: System Port Properties

Port Name This property specifies the name of the system port.

Type This property specifies the port type, which must be serial TCP.

CPU A This is the TCP/IP address or serial port name for CPU A.
Address

CPU B This property specifies the TCP/IP address or serial port name for CPU
Address B, in a redundant configuration.

Parameter For a TCP/IP connection, this property specifies the port number. For a
serial port connection, this property specifies the communication
configuration (baud rate – number of data bits – parity checking
method, number of stop bits).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 89

 General Webmin is a secure tool to configure various DAP functions using a
secure web address.
Eg: https://192.168.0.189:10000

User: root
Password: root

This section is about users and groups and changing passwords. It also
describes the application used to add permissions for those users.

Figure 2-72: System Information

System
General The System tab contains many useful functions for configuring the
DAPserver; these functions are described below:

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 90

 Figure 2-73: System Tab

Change In this window you will select a user to change their password. You will
Passwords be prompted to enter the old password then the new one.

DAP This option is used to assign permissions to a user for the DAPView
Permissions application.

Users and User management is done though here; you will be able to select
Groups Create a new User and select a username and other group properties.
The appropriate information for this section can be found in DAP 5
Quick Start Guide.

Historical Here reports can be configured periodically or manually; these reports

Database monitor a point of your choosing and allow you to export the report in
Report excel format.

Event Files Event files are automatically configured for each Client and Server
application that you configure. If there are any errors or warnings
generated then you can view them here.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 91

Hardware
General This option is used to configure the serial port configuration for the
DAP-100.

Figure 2-74: Hardware Tab

DAP-100 This option allows you to change how the serial ports are configured for
Serial Port the DAP-100 hardware platform. Com Ports 3-10 are RS232/RS485
Configuratio configurable.
n

Figure 2-75: Serial Port Configuration

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 92

Port Group
General Port Group exists in Client, Server and Monitor Application. To access
the Port Group property window, left-click on the port created for the
communication. In the example shown in Figure 3-1, the port created
was COM1. Properties of Port Group are different for each type of
communication. The three types of communication are Serial, TCP/IP,
and UDP/IP. Properties of the Port Group for each of type of
communication are described in the following sections.

Figure 3-1: Port Group Example

Serial
Serial Port For serial communication channel, the Port Group property window is
Group shown in Figure 3-2. Detailed descriptions of the properties are
provided in the following sections.

Figure 3-2: Serial Port Group Property Window

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 93

Driver Name Driver Name is the name of the file (without the extension) that contains
the current port’s driver. The default Driver Name is “CDDPPPort”.

Serial Port Serial Port Name is the name of the DAPserver™’s port that the current
Name Client is connected to. The system supports a maximum of 45 serial
ports; therefore, Serial Port Name ranges from COM0 to COM44.
However, the range may vary for different hardware platforms. Refer to
the hardware platform specification to determine the range of serial
ports supported.
For a Monitor Application, two communication ports maybe used to
monitor the communication traffic. One port is used to monitor the
receiving message for the master, and the other port is used to monitor
the message sent to the slave. Therefore, specify the Serial Port Name
property to connect to the RX line of the master communication port.

Baud Rate The speed of data being transferred between the Client and the
DAPserver™. The minimum baud rate is 75 and the maximum is 256
000. The default value for Baud Rate is 9600.

Data Bits Data Bits is the number of bits used in the data being transferred
between the Client and the DAPserver™. The minimum number of Data
Bits is 5, and the maximum number of Data Bits is 8. The default value
of Data Bits is 8.

Parity Parity is the type of parity checking used for the communication
between the Client and the DAPserver™. The different types are:
“Odd”, “Even”, “Mark”, and “Space”. You may select “No” to disable the
parity check. Odd parity checking sets the parity bit so that there are
odd number of 1’s among the data bits and parity bit. Even parity
checking sets the parity bit so that there are even number of 1’s among
the data bits and parity bit. Mark parity checking permanently sets the
parity bit to 1. Lastly, Space parity checking permanently sets the parity
bit to 0. The default setting for the Parity property is “No”.

Stop Bits The number of stop bits used in the communication between the Client
and the DAPserver™. Values available for the Stop Bits property are 1,
1.5 and 2. The default value is set at 1.

Flow Control The type of flow control for the communication between the device and
the DAPserver™. Setting the Flow Control property to “No” will disable
flow control. Available settings for Flow Control are “XON/XOFF” and
“Hardware”. For XON/XOFF flow control, two specific characters are
assigned to XON and XOFF. When the Receiver sends the XOFF
character during communication, the Transmitter will stop sending data,
and will only resume transmission when the Receiver sends the XON
character. Hardware flow control uses the dedicated signal wires such

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 94

 as RTS/CTS or DTR/DSR to control the data flow. The default setting
for the Flow Control is “No”.

TX Port The serial port name connected to the transmit line of the
Name communication master. TX Port Name property is only valid for a
Monitor Application.

Modem The type of working mode for the modem that is supported by this port.
Support The available options are: None, Server Mode and Client Mode.

Modem The AT command that is used to initialize the modem.

Initialize AT
Command

Modem This property is only valid when the modem is working in the client
Connecting mode. The available options are: Always Connent and Event Driven.
Method When Event Driven is selected, the modem is only connected when
there is information to be sent.

Phone The phone number to dial out for the modem connection. This property
Number is only applicable to the modem working in the client mode.

AT The time, in seconds, to wait for the AT command’s response.

Command
Timeout

Modem Idle The maximum idle period, in seconds, after which the modem hangs
Hangups up, when it is working in the event driven mode.

TCP/IP
TCP/IP Port For TCP/IP communication channel, the Port Group property window is
Group shown in Figure 3-3. Detailed descriptions of the properties are given
below.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 95

 Figure 3-3: TCP/IP Port Group

Driver Name Driver Name is the name of the file (without the extension) that contains
the current port’s driver. The default Driver Name is “CDDPPPort”.

Server IP The Server IP is the IP address of the current device that is providing
the data.
For Monitor Application, the Server IP address is the IP address of the
Server being monitored.

Server Port The Server Port is the port number used by the current device. For
example, for Modbus protocol, IEC® 60870-5-104 protocols, and DNP 3
protocols, the assigned port numbers are 502, 2404 and 20000,
respectively.
For Monitor Application, Server Port is the port number of the Server
being monitored.

Client IP The Client IP property is only valid for Monitor Application. Client IP is
the IP address of the target Client that is being monitored.

UDP/IP
UDP/IP Port For UDP/IP communication channel, the Port Group property window is
Group shown in Figure 3-4. Detailed descriptions of the properties are given
below.

Figure 3-4: UDP/IP Port Group

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 96

Driver Name Driver Name is the name of the file (without the extension) that contains
the current port’s driver. The default Driver Name is “CDDPPPort”.

Receive Port The port number used to receive message from the TCP/IP network.
The Receive Port ranges from 1 to 4 294 967 295.
For Monitor Application, the Receive Port is the receiving port number
for the Client being monitored.

Send Port The port number used to send message to the TCP/IP network. The
Send Port ranges from 1 to 4 294 967 295.
For Monitor Application, the Send Port is the sending port number for
the Client being monitored.

Broadcast The Broadcast IP Address for the UDP communication.

Address

Client The IP address of the target client. It is only valid if used for a monitor
Address application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 97

Client Applications
Client Client communication protocols usually initiate communications with a
Protocols remote device like a protection relay, power meter or communication
processor. The Client communication protocol retrieves information
from the remote device and stores the result in the DAPserver™
database. The Client communication protocol must also be capable of
receiving spontaneous information from the remote device. The Client
communication also forwards commands and instructions to the remote
device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 98

Client Application Summary
Overview The Application Summary properties are accessed by selecting the
Client instance in the System Management window. A sample Client
Application Summary property window is shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5: Client Application Summary

Object Name This property specifies the name of this Client instance in the Real-Time
Database. Each Object Name is unique in the DAPserver™.

Com. The time interval, in seconds, to calculate ratio of frame error and frame
Statistic flow speed. Used to calculate communication channel health. The valid
Interval range is 60 to 600 seconds with a default setting of 60 seconds.

Threshold of The maximum number of communication errors, as a percentage,

Com. Error allowed before the DAPserver™ Client application sets the health of the
Client application to “Bad”.

Time Sync. The interval, in seconds, the DAPserver™ will time synchronize the
Period devices associated with the Client application. The valid range is 1 to
360000 seconds with a default of 60 seconds. Setting the period to -1
will disable the time synchronization of the devices. When the Time
Sync Period is set to 0 the DAPserver™ will only time synchronize the
device during initialization.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 99

Client Application Pseudo Points
Overview The DAPserver™maintains a set of internal data points (pseudo points)
for each Client application. These pseudo points, described in the
following sections, are full function I/O points, available to the
DAPserver™ applications; for example, Server, logic.

Basic Information
Property The Client Application Pseudo Point Basic Information properties,
Window shown in Figure 3-6, are common for all Client protocols and used to
define the core application pseudo point information.

Figure 3-6: Client Application Pseudo Point Basic Information

There is one record in the Client Application Pseudo Point Basic
Information table for each pseudo point defined for this Client instance.

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the Client Application
Pseudo Point information. The Group Name is used by the HMI for
trending and event querying; therefore, using a label (maximum 64
characters) associated with the substation topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the pseudo point; for example, Running Status. This property is used in
the HMI Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property specifies the data type the Client application will use when
storing the pseudo point in the database. The valid pseudo point data
types are:

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 100

 • Discrete
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer
• Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Message

Initial Value During initialization the pseudo point is set, in the database, to the value
specified in this property.

Point Type This property indicates the data type applied to this pseudo point. The
following data types are supported:
• Analog input
• Counter
• Digital input
• Analog output
• Digital output
• Message

Point This property specifies the ownership for this pseudo point. This
Ownership property is set to System for the predefined Client application. Pseudo
points maintained by the DAPserver™. You can create your own
pseudo points for this Client application by setting this property to User
and defining the pseudo point calculating method as a Double Status
Calculating point or a “System” point to have the pseudo point available
to be used in the Logic Application.

Off Name This property defines the name of this digital input pseudo point when it
has a value of 0.

On Name This property defines the name of this digital input pseudo point when it
has a value of 1.

COS This property specifies when a change-of-state alarm is generated for

this digital input pseudo point. The available options are: Disable, Off
State Only, One State Only and On and Off State.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 101

Window Application pseudo points. A sample Client Application Pseudo Point
Value window is shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7: Client Application Pseudo Point Value

There is one record in the Client Application Pseudo Point Value table
for each pseudo point defined for this Client instance.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the pseudo point; for
Description example, Running Status. This property can only be changed from the
Client Application Pseudo Point Basic Information window.

Value This is the current value of the pseudo point.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the pseudo point. The following quality
indicators may be shown:
• The pseudo point is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the pseudo point, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the pseudo
point, has been lost
• The pseudo point is locally or remotely forced
• The pseudo point is out of range

Modify Date The date the pseudo point was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the pseudo point was last updated in the database.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 102

Value (Redundant System)
Property A sample Client Application Pseudo Point Value window, for a
Window redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8: Redundant System Client Application Pseudo

Point Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 103

Client Device Pseudo Points
Overview The DAPserver™ maintains a set of internal data points (pseudo points)
for each device interfaced to a Client application. These pseudo points,
described in the following sections are full function I/O points, available
to the DAPserver™ applications; for example, Server, logic.

The process to add, copy or delete a Client Application Pseudo Points

is similar to the Client Application process.

Basic Information
Property The Client Application Device Pseudo Point Basic Information window
Window and properties are similar to the Client Application higher-level pseudo
points and described in 0Basic Information.

Value
Property The Client Application Device Pseudo Point Value window and
Window properties are similar to the Client Application higher-level pseudo
points and described in 0Value.

Client Device Pseudo Points

Overview The following sections describe the default Client Application Device
pseudo points. These pseudo points are available for all of the Client
communication protocols. Client communication protocol specific device
pseudo points may also be available.

Device A pseudo digital input indicates the current state of communication with
Enabled/ the remote device. A pseudo digital output enables or disables
Disabled communication with the remote device. While disabled, the Client
Application will not poll, accept trip/close, unsolicited responses, or
send user requests to the remote device.

Channel 1 This pseudo digital input reports the communication health (on-line or
Status off-line) to the remote device using the first communication channel.
The Client Application uses the Communication Retries property, in the
Device settings, to evaluate the communication health.

Channel 2 This pseudo digital input reports the communication health (on-line or
Status off-line) to the remote device using the second communication channel.
The Client Application uses the Communication Retries property, in the
Device settings, to evaluate the communication health.

Channel 1 When set to “Active”, this pseudo digital input indicates the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 104

Active DAPserver™ is communicating with the remote device using the first
communication channel. “Standby” indicates the DAPserver™ is not
communicating with the remote device using the first communication
channel.

Channel 2 When set to “Active”, this pseudo digital input indicates the
Active DAPserver™ is communicating with the remote device using the
second communication channel. “Standby” indicates the DAPserver™
is not communicating with the remote device using the second
communication channel.

Enable/ This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Disable
Device
Communica-
tion

Remote Operating this pseudo digital output will reset the remote device. The
Reset the Client application checks the digital output defined for this device and
Device operates all digital outputs with a “Reset” command type. The Client
Application will set the digital inputs and event points with an Auto
Reset property to “Disable”.

Remote Operating this pseudo digital output will instruct the remote device to
Queue report all items defined in the polling table. The Client Application
Integrity Poll performs an integrity poll of the remote device

Remote Operating this pseudo digital output will issue a Time Synchronization
Queue command to the remote device.
TimeSync.
Request

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 105

Analog Inputs

Basic Information
Property The Analog Input Basic Information properties, shown in Figure 3-9, are
Window common for all Client protocols and used to define the core analog input
information.

Figure 3-9: Client Application Analog Input Basic Information

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the analog input
information. The Group Name is used by the HMI for trending and event
querying; therefore, using a label (maximum 64 characters) associated
with the substation topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the analog input; for example, incoming line. This property is used in the
HMI Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property specifies the data type the Client application will use when
storing the analog input in the database. The valid analog input data
types are:
• Discrete
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 106

 • Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Message

Initial Value During initialization the analog input is set, in the database, to the value
specified in this property. A value may be chosen which makes it
convenient to identify the initialization setting. For example, -50 for a
132 kV line would indicate this voltage has not been updated.

Database
Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Dead Band This property specifies the threshold, which must be exceeded before
an analog input data change event is generated. This function
minimizes the number of unnecessary analog input data change events,
thereby improving system performance.
A Dead Band of 1 Amp, for a 1000 Amp line, requires changes as low
as 0.1% to be reported. This low setting exceeds the resolution of the
measuring equipment and may result in noise being reported and
processed. A setting which accommodates the resolution of the
measuring equipment will filter out this meaningless information.

Restore at This property disables/enables the recovery of the old value of this point
Restart from the NVRAM when DAPserver™ is powered up.

Log Method This property specifies the method used by DAPserver™ for logging the
analog input information into the historical database. The available
options are: Disable, Threshold and Sampling Time.

Log This property is used in association with the Log Method property, and
Threshold specifies the threshold used when the Threshold is chosen as the log
method. Whenever the analog input value exceeds this threshold, or
stays above it, it will be logged in the historical database.

Sampling This property specifies the interval, in minutes, to record this analog
Time input in the historical database. The valid range is 0 (disable) to 1440
(once a day) with a default setting of 0.

Calculation
Min Value This property specifies the minimum value permitted for this analog
input. The DAPserver™ will update the database with this value

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 107

 whenever the device reports this analog input is less than this minimum.
The minimum value must be set less than or equal to the associated
Max Value setting. Leaving this property empty, disables the minimum
value checking for this analog input.

Max Value This property specifies the maximum value permitted for this analog
input. The DAPserver™ will update the database with this value
whenever the device reports this analog input is greater than this
maximum. The maximum value must be set to a value greater than or
equal to the associated Min Value setting. Leaving this property empty,
disables the maximum value checking for this analog input.
The Min Value and Max Value are applied when displaying the
analog input value in DAPviewer™. These limits are not
applied when the displaying the analog input value in
DAPstudio™.

Offset/Min The Offset and Multiplier are used to scale the raw value received from
Raw the device, the scaled value is stored in the DAPserver™ database.
The scaling is applied as follows:

Equation 3-1: Client Application Analog Input Scaling

Multiplier/Ma Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Multiplier
x Raw Value range is -10000000 to 10000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Multiplier.

Transform This property specifies the method used in transforming the raw value
Method of the analog input to the engineering value. The available options are:
Scale and Percentage.

Control
Property The Analog Input Control properties, shown in Figure 3-10, are common
Window for all Client protocols. This window defines the relationship between
analog inputs, locking applications, and digital output operations.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 108

 Figure 3-10: Client Application Analog Input Associate &
Lock

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Lower The digital output associated with a lower operation applied to the
Control analog input. A custom window allows you to associate the analog input
Point to a digital output on the same device. This feature can be disabled by
leaving this property empty; any lower control applied to this analog
input will simply subtract one from the value of this analog input.

Raise The digital output associated with a raise operation applied to the
Control analog input. A custom window allows you to associate the analog input
Point to a digital output on the same device. This feature can be disabled by
leaving this property empty; any raise control applied to this analog
input will simply add one to the value of this analog input.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client
Window Application analog inputs. A sample Client Application Analog Input
Value window, for a non-redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-11.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 109

 Figure 3-11: Client Application Analog Input Value

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the analog input; for
Description example, transformer 1 winding temperature. This property can only be
changed from the Analog Input Basic Information window.

Value This is the current value of the analog input.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the analog input. The following quality
indicators may be shown:
• The analog input is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the analog input, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the analog
input, has been lost
• The analog input is locally or remotely forced
• The analog input is out of range

Modify Date The date the analog input was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the analog input was last updated in the database.

Value (Redundant System)

Property A sample Client Application Analog Input Value window, for a redundant
Window system, is shown in Figure 3-12.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 110

 Figure 3-12: Redundant System Client Application Analog
Input Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 111

Digital Inputs

Basic Information
Property The Digital Input Basic Information properties, shown in Figure 3-13,
Window are common for all Client protocols and used to define the core digital
input information.

Figure 3-13: Client Application Digital Input Basic Information

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the digital input
information. The Group Name is used by the HMI for event querying;
therefore, using a label (maximum 64 characters) associated with the
substation topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the digital input; for example, breaker. This property is used in the HMI
Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property indicates the data format for the digital input in the system
database. The Digital Input Value Type can be a single point or double
point value. The default setting is the more frequently used single point.

Initial Value During initialization, the digital input is set to the state specified in this
property. The valid options are “Open” or “Close” with “Open” being the
default setting.

Class This property specifies the class to which this point belongs. The
available options are: Alarm, Fault, Status and Information.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 112

Value (0) This property specifies the name of a digital input that is defined as a
Name double point whenever it has a value equal to 0.

Open Name This is the text string associated with the digital input when the digital
input is in the open state. This string is shown in DAPstudio™ user
interface, HMI, and is recorded into Historic Database. The Open Name
can be set to one of the predefined strings or input by the user.

Close Name This is the text string associated with the digital input when the digital
input is in the closed state. This string is shown in DAPstudio™ user
interface, HMI, and is recorded into Historic Database. The Close Name
can be set to one of the predefined strings or input by the user.

Value (3) This property specifies the name of a digital input that is defined as a
Name double point whenever it has a value equal to 3.

Database
Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Inverted The DAPserver™will record the inverted raw state in the database.
State Digital input inversion can be enabled or disabled, with disable as the
default setting. The following settings are applied:
• Disable – Inversion is disabled, a single point digital input is
logged as a 1, a double point is logged as a 2. Clearing a single
point digital input is logged as a 0, a double point as a 1.
• Enable – Inversion is enabled, a single point digital input is
logged as a 0, and a double point is logged as a 1. Clearing a
single point digital input is logged as a 1, a double point as a 2.

Latch This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Restore at This property disables/enables the recovery of the old value of this point
Restart from the NVRAM when DAPserver™ is powered up.

Alarm Settings
Property The Digital Input Alarm Settings properties, shown in Figure 3-14, are
Window common for all Client protocols.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 113

 Figure 3-14: Client Application Digital Input Event Setting

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

COS This property enables or disables the reporting of COS digital input
changes to DAPstudio™, and logging into the Historical database. The
following COS settings are available:
• Disable – A COS digital input change is never reported to
DAPstudio™ or logged in the Historical database.
• Open State Only – A COS digital input change is only reported to
DAPstudio™ and logged in the Historical database when the
digital input changes from closed to open.
• Close State Only – A COS digital input change is only reported to
DAPstudio™ and logged in the Historical database when the
digital input changes from open to closed.
• Open and Close State – A COS digital input change is reported
to DAPserver™ and logged into the Historical database
whenever the digital input changes state.

Control
Property The Digital Input Control properties, shown in Figure 3-15, are common
Window for all Client protocols. This window defines the relationship between
digital inputs, locking applications, and digital output operations.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 114

 Figure 3-15: Client Application Digital Input Associate & Lock

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Open DO The digital output associated with a trip operation applied to the digital
Point input. A custom window allows you to associate the digital input to a
digital output on the same device. This feature can be disabled by
leaving this property empty; any trip control applied to this digital input
will simply set the value of this digital input to open.

Close DO The digital output associated with a close operation applied to the digital
Point input. A custom window allows you to associate the digital input to a
digital output on the same device. This feature can be disabled by
leaving this property empty, any close control applied to this digital input
will simply set the value of this digital input to closed.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client
Window Application digital inputs. A sample Client Application Digital Input Value
window, for a non-redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-16.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 115

 Figure 3-16: Client Application Digital Input Value

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the digital input; for
Description example, breaker. This property can only be changed from the Digital
Input Basic Information window.

Value This is the current state of the digital input.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the digital input. The following quality
indicators may be shown:
• The digital input is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the digital input, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the digital input,
has been lost
• The digital input is locally or remotely forced

Modify Date The date the digital input was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the digital input was last updated in the database.

Value (Redundant System)

Property A sample Client Application Digital Input Value window, for a redundant
Window system, is shown in Figure 3-17.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 116

 Figure 3-17: Redundant System Client Application Digital
Input Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

Counters

Basic Information
Property The Counter Basic Information properties, shown in Figure 3-18, are
Window common for all Client protocols and used to define the core counter
information.

Figure 3-18: Client Application Counter Basic Information

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the counter information.
The Group Name is used by the HMI for trending and event querying;
therefore, using a label (maximum 64 characters) associated with the
substation topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 117

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the counter; for example, breaker. This property is used in the HMI
Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property specifies the data type the Client application will use when
storing the counter in the database. The valid counter data types are:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer
• Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point

Initial Value During initialization the counter is set, in the database, to the value
specified in this property.

Database
Reference The Reference Name respresents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Dead Band This property specifies the threshold, which must be exceeded before a
counter data change event is generated. This function minimizes the
number of unnecessary counter data change events, thereby improving
system performance.

Restore at This property disables/enables the recovery of the old value of this point
Restart from the NVRAM when DAPserver™ is powered up.

Log Method This property specifies the method used by DAPserver™ for logging the
analog input information into the historical database. The available
options are: Disable, Threshold and Sampling Time.

Log This property is used in association with the Log Method property, and
Threshold specifies the threshold used when the Threshold is chosen as the log
method. Whenever the analog input value exceeds this threshold, or
stays above it, it will be logged in the historical database.

Sampling This property specifies the interval, in minutes, to record this counter in
Time (min) the historical database. The valid range is 0 (disable) to 1440 (once a
day) with a default setting of 0.

Calculation
Min Value This property specifies the minimum value permitted for this counter.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 118

 The DAPserver™ will update the database with this value whenever the
device reports this counter is less than this minimum. The minimum
value must be set less than or equal to the associated Max Value
setting. Leaving this property empty disables the minimum value
checking for this counter.

Max Value This property specifies the maximum value permitted for this counter.
The DAPserver™ will update the database with this value whenever the
device reports this counter is greater than this maximum. The maximum
value must be set to a value greater than or equal to the associated Min
Value setting. Leaving this property empty disables the maximum value
checking for this counter.

Offset/Min The Offset and Multiplier are used to scale the raw value received from
Raw the device, the scaled value is stored in the DAPserver™ database.
The scaling is applied as follows:

Equation 3-2: Client Application Counter Scaling

Multiplier/Ma Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Multiplier
x Raw Value range is -10000000 to 10000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Multiplier.

Transform This property specifies the method used in transforming the raw value
Method of the analog input to the engineering value. The available options are:
Scale and Percentage.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client
Window Application counters. A sample Client Application Counter Value
window, for a non-redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19: Client Application Counter Value

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 119

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the counter; for example,
Description breaker. This property can only be changed from the Counter Basic
Information window.

Value This is the current value of the counter.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the counter. The following quality
indicators may be shown:
• The counter is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the counter, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the counter, has
been lost
• The counter is locally or remotely forced
• The counter has rolled over

Modify Date The date the counter was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the counter was last updated in the database.

Value (Redundant System)

Property A sample Client Application Counter Value window, for a redundant
Window system, is shown in Figure 3-20.

Figure 3-20: Redundant System Client Application Counter

Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

Analog Outputs

Basic Information
Property The Analog Output Basic Information properties, shown in Figure 3-21,
Window are common for all Client protocols and used to define the core analog

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 120

 output information.

Figure 3-21: Client Application Analog Output Basic

Information

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the analog output
information. The Group Name is used by the HMI for trending and event
querying; therefore, using a label (maximum 64 characters) associated
with the substation topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the analog output; for example, transformer 1. This property is used in
the HMI Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property specifies the data type the Client application will use when
storing the analog output in the database. The valid analog output data
types are:
• Discrete
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer
• Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 121

Initial Value During initialization, the analog output is set in the database, to the
value specified in this property.

Alarm Settings
Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Setting This property disables/enables the alarm when the point’s setting
Change changes.
Alarm

DI Name for This property specifies the digital input used (typically a pseudo digital
Alarm AO input) to alarm a difference between this analog output and the last
Change confirmed value. No change alarms issued when this property is left
blank.

Point Name This property specifies the analog input (typically a pseudo point) used
For to store the last confirmed analog output value. This value is updated
Confirmed when this analog output is updated and confirmed by operating the
Value “Remote Reset Device” pseudo control. During a DAPserver™ restart,
the last confirmed value is retrieved from the historical database.

Control
Property The Analog Output Control properties, shown in Figure 3-22, are
Window common for all Client protocols. This window defines the relationships
between analog outputs, locking applications, and output types.

Figure 3-22: Client Application Analog Output Associate &

Lock

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 122

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Associate This property specifies the analog input or counter point used (typically
Output AI or a pseudo analog input or counter) to issue an analog output command
CT when they change. No analog output is issued when this property is left
blank.

Set This property uses the programmable logic function to define the
Interlocking interlocking logic applied when operating this analog output.

Refer to the Programmable Logic section for more information

on using this function.

Operate The Operate Method for Analog Outputs operation method will be:
Method • Direct operate
• Select before operate

Operate This property is only used when the Operate method is set to “Select-
Timeouts Before-Operate” and is the maximum amount of time, in milliseconds,
allowed between the Select command and Operate command. The
valid range is 1000 to 60000 milliseconds with a default setting of 10000
(10 seconds).

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client
Window Application analog outputs. A sample Client Application Analog Output
Value window, for a non-redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-23.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 123

 Figure 3-23: Client Application Analog Output Value

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the analog output; for
Description example, transformer 1 taps position. This property can only be
changed from the analog Output Basic Information window.

Interlocking This is the current status of the interlocking logic for this analog output.
An empty field indicates operation of this analog output is blocked by
the interlocking logic.

Value This is the current value of the analog output.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the analog output. The following
quality indicators may be shown:
• The analog output is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the analog output, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the analog
output, has been lost
• The analog output is locally or remotely forced
• The analog output is out of range

Modify Date The date the analog output was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the analog output was last updated in the database.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 124

Value (Redundant System)
Property A sample Client Application Analog Output Value window, for a
Window redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24: Redundant System Client Application Analog

Output Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 125

Digital Outputs

Basic Information
Property The Digital Output Basic Information properties, shown in Figure 3-25,
Window are common for all Client protocols and used to define the core digital
output information.

Figure 3-25: Client Application Digital Output Basic

Information

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the digital output
information. The Group Name is used by the HMI for event querying;
therefore, using a label (maximum 64 characters) associated with the
substation topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the digital output; for example, breaker. This property is used in the HMI
Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property indicates the data format for the digital output in the
system database. The Digital Output Value Type can be a single point
or double point value. The default setting is the more frequently used
single point.

Initial Value This property specifies the state (set or cleared) this digital output is
initialized to within the DAPserver™ database.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 126

Command This property specifies the output type used to command the remote
Type device. The following output types are available:
• Trip/Close
• Regulating step
• Reset
• Freeze

Control
Property The Digital Output Control properties, shown in Figure 3-26, are
Window common for all Client protocols. This window defines the relationships
between digital outputs, locking applications, and output types.

Figure 3-26: Client Application Digital Output Associate &

Lock

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Associate This property specifies the digital input or event point used (typically a
Output DI or pseudo digital input or counter) to issue a digital output control
Event command when they change state. No control output is issued when
this property is left blank.

Trip This property uses the programmable logic function to define the
Interlocking interlocking logic applied when tripping this digital output.

Refer to the Programmable Logic section for information on

developing trip interlocking.

Close This property uses the programmable logic function to define the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 127

Interlocking interlocking logic applied when closing this digital output.

Refer to the Programmable Logic section for information on

developing close interlocking.

Operate The Digital Output can be a “Direct Operate” or “Select-Before-Operate”

Method command. The default setting is “Direct Operate”.

Operate This is the maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, allowed between

Timeouts the Select command and Operate command. The valid range is 1000 to
60000 milliseconds with a default setting of 10000 (10 seconds). This
setting is applied when the Operate Method is set to “SBO”.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client
Window Application digital outputs. A sample Client Application Digital Output
Value window, for a non-redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27: Client Application Digital Output Value

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the digital output; for
Description example, breaker. This property can only be changed from the Digital
Output Basic Information window.

Interlocking This is the current status of the interlocking logic for this digital output.
“Trip” indicates trip operation of this digital output is permitted by the trip
interlocking logic. “Close” indicates close operation of this digital output
is permitted by the close interlocking logic.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 128

Value This is the current state of the digital output.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the digital output. The following quality
indicators may be shown:
• The digital output is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the digital output, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the digital
output, has been lost
• The digital output is locally or remotely forced

Modify Date The date the digital output was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the digital output was last updated in the database.

Value (Redundant System)

Property A sample Client Application Digital Output Value window, for a
Window redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28: Redundant System Client Application Digital

Output Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 129

Event Points

Basic Information
Property The Event Point Basic Information properties, shown in Figure 3-29, are
Window common for all Client protocols and used to define the core event point
information.

Figure 3-29: Client Application Event Point Basic Information

Bay Name This property defines the name of the bay to which this point belongs.

Group Name This property is a unique name used in conjunction with the following
Point Description property when referencing the event point information.
The Group Name is used by the HMI for event querying; therefore,
using a label (maximum 64 characters) associated with the substation
topology is recommended.

Name This property specifies the name of this point. It should be unique within
the bay and group to which it belongs.

Point This property provides a descriptive label (maximum 128 characters) for
Description the event point; for example, breaker. This property is used in the HMI
Application Point Status Viewer and Event Recorder.

Value Type This property indicates the data format for the event point in the system
database. The Event Point Value Type can be a single point or double
point value. The default setting is the more frequently used single point.

Initial Value During initialization, the event point is set to the state specified in this
property. The valid options are “Open” or “Close” with “Open” being the
default setting.

Class This property specifies the class to which this point belongs. The

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 130

 available options are: Alarm, Fault, Status and Information.

Value (0) This property specifies the name of a digital input that is defined as a
Name double point whenever it has a value equal to 0.

Open Name This is the text string associated with the digital input when the digital
input is in the open state. This string is shown in DAPstudio™ user
interface, HMI, and is recorded into Historic Database. The Open Name
can be set to one of the predefined strings or input by the user.

Close Name This is the text string associated with the digital input when the digital
input is in the closed state. This string is shown in DAPstudio™ user
interface, HMI, and is recorded into Historic Database. The Close Name
can be set to one of the predefined strings or input by the user.

Value (3) This property specifies the name of a digital input that is defined as a
Name double point whenever it has a value equal to 3.

Database
Reference This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Name

Inverted The DAPserver™ will record the inverted raw state in its database.
State Event point inversion can be enabled or disabled with “Disable” as the
default setting. The following settings are applied:
• Disable – Inversion is disabled, a single point event is logged as
a 1, a double point event is logged as a 2. Clearing a single point
event is logged as a 0, a double point event as a 1.
• Enable – Inversion is enabled, a single point event is logged as a
0, and a double point event is logged as a 1. Clearing a single
point event is logged as a 1, a double point event as a 2.

Latch This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Restore at This property disables/enables the recovery of the old value of this point
Restart from the NVRAM when DAPserver™ is powered up.

Alarm Settings
Property The Event Point Alarm Settings properties, shown in Figure 3-30, are
Window common for all Client protocols.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 131

 Figure 3-30: Client Application Event Point Event Setting

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

COS This property enables or disables the reporting of COS events to

DAPstudio™, and logging into the Historical database. The following
COS settings are available:
• Disable – A COS event is never reported to DAPstudio™ or
logged in the Historical database.
• Off State Only – A COS event is only reported to DAPstudio™
and logged in the Historical database when the event point
changes from close to open.
• On State Only – A COS event is only reported to DAPstudio™
and logged in the Historical database when the event point
changes from open to close.
• On and Off State – A COS event is reported to DAPstudio™ and
logged into the Historical database whenever the event point
changes state.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Client
Window Application event points. A sample Client Application Event Point Value
window, for a non-redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-31.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 132

 Figure 3-31: Client Application Event Point Value

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This property provides a descriptive label for the event point; for
Description example, breaker. This property can only be changed from the Event
Point Basic Information window.

Value This is the current state of the event point.

Quality This field is a quality indicator for the event point. The following quality
indicators may be shown:
• The event point is On-line or Off-line
• The device, associated with the event point, has restarted
• Communication with the device, associated with the event point,
has been lost
• The event point is locally or remotely forced

Modify Date The date the event point was last updated in the database.

Modify Time The time the event point was last updated in the database.

Value (Redundant System)

Property A sample Client Application Event Point Value window, for a redundant
Window system, is shown in Figure 3-32.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 133

 Figure 3-32: Redundant System Client Application Event
Point Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time described in 0are
reported independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 134

IEC® 60870-5-101
Client The IEC® 60870-5-101 Client retrieves information and sends
commands to IEC® 60870-5-101 devices. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Client
can address multiple IEC® 60870-5-101 devices on a single
communication channel.

IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol Parameter

Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-
Window 101 Client “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Protocol Parameter property
window is shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Protocol Parameters

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the link layer address for
Link the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client. The link address must be one or two
Address bytes.

Link Idle This is the minimum waiting time, in milliseconds, after sending a no
Interval confirm frame. The valid range is 10 to 100000 milliseconds with a
default setting of 10.

Address as This property specifies the controlling station address for a balanced
Controlled mode connection. The valid addresses are 0 to 65535.
Station

IEC® 60870-5-101 Device

Property The IEC® 60870-5-101 Device properties are accessed by selecting the
Window IEC® 60870-5-101 device in the System Management window. The
IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Device property window is shown in Figure
3-34.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 135

 Figure 3-34: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Device

Device This is the remote device IEC® 60870-5-101 address which must be
Address unique within an IEC® 60870-5-101 Client when a multi-drop connection
is used. DAPstudio™ uses the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device
Address to reference a device; for example, Merlin Gerin -FTU100:3

Restart This is the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range
Delay is 0 to 100000 seconds with a default value of 30 seconds.

Timeout for This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an
Application application layer query response. The valid range is 10 to 100000
Layer milliseconds with a default setting of 1000 (1 second).

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Common Address of
Common ASDU for the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client. Table 3-1 defines the available
Address of common addresses for each option; one, two, three or four byte
ASDU Common Address of ASDU.

Table 3-1: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Common Address

Length of Common Common Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 1 to 254 with 0 and 255
reserved for broadcast common address.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 136

 Length of Common Common Address
Address
2 bytes The valid range is 1 to 65534 with 0 and
65535 reserved for broadcast common
address.
3 bytes The valid range is 1 to 16777214 with 0
and 16777215 reserved for broadcast
common address.
4 bytes The valid range is 1 to 4294967294 with 0
and 4294967295 reserved for broadcast
common address.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Cause of Transmission
COT (COT) field. The Cause of Transmission can be one or two bytes.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Information Object
Info. Object Address for the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client. Table 3-2 defines the
Address available information object addresses for each option; one, two, three,
or four byte addresses.
Table 3-2: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Information Object
Address
Length of Info Object Information Object Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 0 to 255.
2 bytes The valid range is 0 to 65535.
3 bytes The valid range is 0 to 16777215.
4 bytes The valid range is 0 to 4294967295.

Integrity This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™

Interval(ms) does an integrity poll with the IEC® 60870-5-101 device. The valid
range is 0 to 86400000(1 day), with a default of 0 (disable). Decreasing
the polling frequency decreases the data update time and increases the
available communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a
value less than or equal to the desired maximum data update time.

Transmission This property specifies® the method used by the DAPserver™to read
of Integrated counters from the IEC 60870-5-101 device. The following methods are
Totals supported for reading the counter data:
• Disable – Counters are not read from the IEC® 60870-5-101
device.
• Mode A - The IEC® 60870-5-101 device performs a local freeze
and uses unsolicited messaging to report the counter data.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 137

 • Mode B - The IEC® 60870-5-101 device performs a local freeze,
the DAPserver™ polls for the counter data. The period that
DAPserver™ polls for the counter data from IEC® 60870-5-101
device is defined as the Counter Info Group.
• Mode C - The DAPserver™ issues a freeze and polls the IEC®
60870-5-101 device for the counter data.
• Mode D - The DAPserver™ issues a freeze while the IEC®
60870-5-101 device uses unsolicited messaging to report the
counter data.

Counter This property specifies the frequency, in seconds; the DAPserver™

Freeze freezes the IEC® 60870-5-101 device counters. The valid range is 10 to
Period(s) 100000000, with a default of 60 (once a minute). Decreasing the
freezing frequency increases the available communication bandwidth.
This property is only applied when the Transmission of Integrated
Totals property is set to Mode C or Mode D.

Time Sync. This is the frequency, in seconds, the DAPserver™ time synchronizes
Period the IEC® 60870-5-101 device. The valid range is 1 to 3600000 seconds
and disable (-1) with a default setting of 60 (1 minute). This property
has no effect when the broadcast time synchronization is enabled in the
Client Application Summary table.

Negative This property specifies the format the IEC® 60870-5-101 device will use
Number when reporting negative values. The default setting is the more
Format commonly used two’s complement format. The alternate, Direct setting
sets the most significant sign bit to 1.

Class 2 This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™

Polling polls the IEC® 60870-5-101 device for class 2 data. The valid range is
Period 10 to 100000000, with a default of 500. Decreasing the polling
frequency decreases the class 2 data update time and increases the
available communication bandwidth.

Group Info Refer to 0Group Info for detailed information on the IEC® 60870-5-101
Client Group Information table.

Counter Refer to 0Counter Group Info for detailed information on the IEC®
Group Info 60870-5-101 Client Counter Group Information table.

EI Frame This property instructs the DAPserver™ to wait or not wait for an End of
Initialization of frame from the IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Data Link This property enables or disables data link confirmation between the
DAPserver™ and IEC® 60870-5-101 device. When this property is

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 138

Confirm enabled the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client uses the Send-Confirm method to
communicate with the IEC® 60870-5-101 device. When this property is
disabled the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client uses the Send-No Confirm to
communicate with the IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Time Format This property specifies the time used by the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client to
time synchronize the device. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Client will use
either UTC or local time.

Delay This property enables or disables the calculation of transmission delays

Acquisition before a time synchronization is sent to the IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Originator This property specifies the Originator Address which is only used when
the Cause of Transmission is 2 bytes (see Length of COT).

Select This is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and operate
Timeouts command sent by a Server application to this Client application. The
valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 30 seconds.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communic- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

ation Fail communication with the IEC® 60870-5-101 device is failed. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The valid range of
automatic retries is 1 to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

Group Info
Property The IEC® 60870-5-101 Group Info properties are accessed by selecting
Window the IEC® 60870-5-101 device in the System Management window. The
IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Group Info property window is shown in Figure
3-35.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 139

 Figure 3-35: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Group Info
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Group Info table for
each group requested from the IEC® 60870-5-101 device. A maximum
of 16 records (object groups) is permitted per IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Group No This property specifies the group number for this set of information
objects. The group number must be in the range 1 to 16.

Start Index This property specifies the point index for the first object within this
group. The Start Index operates in conjunction with the End Index
property to define the range of point indices assigned to this group.

End Index This property specifies the point index for the last object within this
group. All points greater than or equal to the Start Index and less than
or equal to the End Index are included in this group.

Polling This property specifies the frequency, in seconds, the DAPserver™

Period polls the IEC® 60870-5-101 device for this group. The valid range is 0 to
3600000, with a default of 0 (disable). Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the group update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less
than or equal to the desired maximum group update time.

Counter Group Info

Property The IEC® 60870-5-101 Counter Group Info properties are accessed by
Window selecting the IEC® 60870-5-101 device in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Counter Group Info property

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 140

 window is shown in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Counter Group Info

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Counter Group Info
table for each counter group requested from the IEC® 60870-5-101
device. A maximum of four records (counter groups) is permitted per
IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Group No This property specifies the counter group number which must be in the
range 1 to 4.

Start Index This property specifies the point index for the first counter within this
counter group. The Start Index operates in conjunction with the End
Index property to define the range of point indices assigned to this
counter group.

End Index This property specifies the point index for the last counter within this
counter group. All points greater than or equal to the Start Index and
less than or equal to the End Index are included in this counter group.

Period for This property specifies the frequency, in seconds, the DAPserver™
Freeze and freezes and polls the IEC® 60870-5-101 device for this counter group.
Poll The valid range is 0 to 3600000, with a default of 0 (disable).
Decreasing the polling frequency decreases the counter group update
time and increases the available communication bandwidth. This
property should be set to a value less than or equal to the desired
maximum counter group update time.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-37 is
Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-101 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 141

 Figure 3-37: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Analog Input I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Analog Input I/O
Parameters table for each analog input requested from the IEC® 60870-
5-101 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address analog input. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Device
table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information). Table 3-1
summarizes the Common Addresses available for each common
address length.

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this analog input. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Device table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information).
Table 3-2 summarizes the Information Object Addresses available for
each information object address length.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-38 is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-101 device.

Figure 3-38: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Digital Input I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Digital Input I/O
Parameters table for each digital input requested from the IEC® 60870-

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 142

 5-101 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address digital input. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Device
table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information). Table 3-1
summarizes the Common Addresses available for each common
address length.

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this digital input. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Device table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information).
Table 3-2 summarizes the Information Object Addresses available for
each information object address length.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-39
Window is used to specify the counter inputs retrieved from an IEC® 60870-5-
101 device.

Figure 3-39: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Counter I/O

Parameters table for each counter requested from the IEC® 60870-5-
101 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address counter. The Common Address range is dependent upon the Length of

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 143

 Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Device table (see
IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information). Table 3-1 summarizes
the Common Addresses available for each common address length.

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this counter. The Information Object Address range is dependent upon
the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101
Device table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information).
Table 3-2 summarizes the Information Object Addresses available for
each information object address length.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-40,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in an IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Figure 3-40: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Analog Output I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Analog Output I/O
Parameters table for each analog output set in the IEC® 60870-5-101
device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address analog output. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Device
table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information). Table 3-1
summarizes the Common Addresses available for each common
address length.

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this analog output. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Device table (see IEC® 60870-5-103 Device for more information).
Table 3-2 summarizes the Information Object Addresses available for
each information object address length.

Output This is the ASDU type used to transfer this analog output to the IEC®

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 144

ASDU Type 60870-5-101 device. The available analog output ASDU types are listed
in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Analog Output ASDU Type
ASDU Type Description
C_SE_NA_1 <48> Set point command, normalized value
C_SE_NB_1 <49> Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NC_1 <50> Set point command, short floating point
number

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-41,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in an IEC® 60870-5-101 device.

Figure 3-41: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Digital Output I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Digital Output I/O
Parameters table for each digital output operated in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address digital output. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Device
table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information). Table 3-1
summarizes the Common Addresses available for each common
address length.

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this digital output. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Device table (see IEC® 60870-5-101 Device for more information).
Table 3-2 summarizes the Information Object Addresses available for
each information object address length.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 145

QU This property specifies how this digital output is operated using the QU
portion of the QOC (Quality of Command). The following settings are
available:
• No additional definition.
• Short pulse duration whose duration is determined by the IEC®
60870-5-101 device.
• Long pulse duration whose duration is determined by the IEC®
60870-5-101 device.
• Persistent output

Output This is the ASDU type used to transfer this digital input to the IEC®
ASDU Type 60870-5-101 device. The available digital output ASDU types are listed
in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Digital Output ASDU Type
ASDU Type Description
C_SC_NA_1 <45> Single command
C_DC_NA_1 <46> Double command
C_RC_NA_1 <47> Regulating step command.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 146

IEC® 60870-5-103
Client The IEC® 60870-5-103 Client retrieves information and sends
commands to IEC® 60870-5-103 devices. The IEC® 60870-5-103 Client
can address multiple IEC® 60870-5-103 devices on a single
communication channel.
The following sections describe the standard (without
manufacturer specific extensions) IEC® 60870-5-103 Client.

IEC® 60870-5-103 Protocol Parameter

Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-
Window 103 Client “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Protocol Parameter property
window is shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42: IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Protocol Parameters

Link Idle This is the minimum waiting time, in milliseconds, after sending a no
Interval confirm frame and broadcast frame. The valid range is 0 to 100000
milliseconds with a default setting of 10.

Link Retries This property is the number of retries when a valid response is not
received from the IEC® 60870-5-103 device. The total communication
attempts performed is one greater than this value, which equates to the
initial attempt plus the retries. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default
setting of 2 retries.

V-Port This property will enable concurrent VPort operation on the IEC®
Binding 60870-5-103 Client communication channel.

V-Port This is the maximum amount of time the DAPserver™will wait for a
Timeout response to a VPort message. This property has no effect when the
VPort property is disabled. The valid range is 100 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default of 5000 (5 second).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 147

V-Port This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait when querying from VPort
Connect before cutting off VPort connection. Only one link connection is allowed
Timeout for the IEC® 60870-5-103 interface, the real-time communication with
the IEC® 60870-5-103 Client is suspended. If there is no communication
from the VPort channel, after a certain timeout, the IEC® 60870-5-103
Client will disconnect VPort connection and restore the real-time
communication. The valid range is 100 to 3600000 milliseconds with a
default of 30000 (30 second).

IEC® 60870-5-103 Device

Property The IEC® 60870-5-103 Device properties are accessed by selecting the
Window IEC® 60870-5-103 device in the System Management window. The
IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Device property window is shown in Figure
3-43.

Figure 3-43: IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Device

Device This is the remote device IEC® 60870-5-103 address which must be
Address unique within an IEC® 60870-5-103 Client when a multi-drop connection
is used. DAPstudio™ uses the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device
Address to reference a device; for example, AREVA-P543:3

Restart This is the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range
Delay is 0 to 100000 seconds with a default value of 0 seconds.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 148

App Query This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an
Timeout application layer query response. The valid range is 100 to 60000
milliseconds with a default setting of 1000 (1 second).

Integrity Poll This property specifies the frequency, in seconds, the DAPserver™
Period polls the IEC® 60870-5-103 device with an integrity poll. The valid range
is 30 to 1000000, with a default of 900. Decreasing the polling
frequency decreases the Integrity data update time and increases the
available communication bandwidth.

Time This is the frequency, entered in seconds, the DAPserver™ time

®
Synchroniza- synchronizes the IEC 60870-5-103 device. The valid range is -1
tion Period (disable) to 100000000 seconds. This property has no effect when the
Broadcast Time Synchronization Period defined in the Client Application
Summary Table is set to number greater than 0. The default Time
Synchronization Period is set to 300 seconds.

First For normal IEC 60870-5-103 link layer process, the first command for
Command is IEC® 60870-5-103 Client issues a Call Link Status. However, for some
Reset Link of the IEC® 60870-5-103 devices the first command the device can
accept is the Reset Link command. In this case, the property should be
enabled.

Bit Length of This property specifies the number of bits included for a measurement.
®
Measurement Bit lengths of 13, 14, 15, and 16 are supported with 13 bits, the IEC
Value 60870-5-103 default standard.

Allow E5 to This property allows E5 to confirm data link reset and call data link
Confirm status. If enabled, E5 frame is allowed to confirm data link reset and call
DataLink data link status. This property is disabled by default.

Select This property specifies the timeouts in seconds for auto-canceling

Timeout remote control selection command sent by Server application to this
Client. The default Select Timeout is set to 30 seconds.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 149

Period associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communica- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

tion Fail communication with the IEC® 60870-5-103 device fails. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of
automatic retries is 0 (disable retries) to 1000. The default setting is 3
retries.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-44 is
Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-103 device.

Figure 3-44: IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Analog Input I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Analog Input I/O
Parameters table for each analog input requested from the IEC® 60870-
5-103 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU for the IEC®
Address 60870-5-103 device. The ASDU address is one octet with a valid range
of 0 to 254, 255 is reserved for broadcast. The default Common
Address of ASDU is 1.

Function This property specifies the IEC Function Type corresponding to the
Type(FUN) analog input information returned by the IEC® 60870-5-103 device. The
IEC® 60870-5-103 Information Object Identifier consists of the Function
Type and Info. ID. The valid range is 0 to 255, supporting the IEC and
Private types, with a default of 1.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 150

Info. ID This property specifies the information number of the specified Function
Type. The valid range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 1.

Position IEC® 60870-5-103 can have multiple measurements associated with a

single Information Number. Information Numbers 144 to 159 are served
for IEC® 60870-5-103 measurements. Information Numbers 240 to 255
are available for generic, vendor specific measurements.
This property specifies the position (index) of the analog input within the
set of measurements returned by the IEC® 60870-5-103 device. The
first returned measurement is position 1; the second measurement is
position 2, etcetera. Table 3-5 summarizes the positions of the analog
inputs in the predefined IEC® 60870-5-103 information numbers.
Table 3-5: IEC® 60870-5-103 Measurements
Information Measurement Position
Number
144 Current 1
145 Current 1
Voltage 2
146 Current 1
Voltage 2
Active power 3
Reactive power 4
147 Neutral current 1
Neutral voltage 2
148 Current, line 1 1
Current, line 2 2
Current, line 3 3
Voltage, line 1 4
Voltage, line 2 5
Voltage, line 3 6
Active power 7
Reactive power 8
Frequency 9

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3- is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-103 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 151

 Figure 3-45: IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Digital Input I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Digital Input I/O
Parameters table for each digital input requested from the IEC® 60870-
5-103 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU for the IEC®
Address 60870-5-103 device. The ASDU address is one octet with a valid range
of 0 to 254, 255 is reserved for broadcast. The default Common
Address of ASDU is 1.

Function This property specifies the IEC Function Type corresponding to the
Type(FUN) digital input information returned by the IEC® 60870-5-103 device. The
IEC® 60870-5-103 Information Object Identifier consists of the Function
Type and Info. ID. The valid range is 0 to 255, supporting the IEC and
Private types, with a default of 1.

Info. ID This property specifies the information number of the specified Function
Type. The valid range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 1.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-46,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in an IEC® 60870-5-103 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 152

 Figure 3-46: IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Digital Output I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Digital Output I/O
Parameters table for each digital output operated in the IEC® 60870-5-
103 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU for the IEC®
Address 60870-5-103 device. The ASDU address is one octet with a valid range
of 0 to 254, 255 is reserved for broadcast. The default Common
Address of ASDU is 1.

Function This property specifies the IEC Function Type corresponding to the
Type(FUN) digital output information returned by the IEC® 60870-5-103 device. The
IEC® 60870-5-103 Information Object Identifier consists of the Function
Type and Info. ID. The valid range is 0 to 255, supporting the IEC and
Private types, with a default of 1.

Info. ID This property specifies the information number of the specified Function
Type. The valid range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 1.

Event Point I/O Parameters

Property The Event Point I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-47 is
Window used to specify the event points retrieved from an IEC® 60870-5-103
device.

Figure 3-47: IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Event Point I/O

Parameters

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 153

 There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Client Event Point I/O
Parameters table for each event point requested from the IEC® 60870-
5-103 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU for the IEC®
Address 60870-5-103 device. The ASDU address is one octet with a valid range
of 0 to 254, 255 is reserved for broadcast. The default Common
Address of ASDU is 1.

Function This property specifies the IEC Function Type corresponding to the
Type(FUN) event point information returned by the IEC® 60870-5-103 device. The
IEC® 60870-5-103 Information Object Identifier consists of the Function
Type and Info. ID. The valid range is 0 to 255, supporting the IEC and
Private types, with a default of 1.

Info. ID This property specifies the information number of the specified Function
Type. The valid range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 1.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 154

IEC® 60870-5-103 (Reyrolle)
Client The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client retrieves information and sends
commands to IEC® 60870-5-103 devices using Reyrolle private
commands. The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client can address multiple
IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle devices on a single communication
channel.

IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Protocol Parameter

Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-
Window 103 Reyrolle Client “Protocol Parameter” option in the System
Management window. The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Protocol
Parameter property window is shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Protocol

Parameters

Link Idle This is the minimum waiting time, in milliseconds, after sending a no
Interval confirm frame and broadcast frame. The valid range is 0 to 100000
milliseconds with a default setting of 10.

Link Retries This property is the number of retries when a valid response is not
received from the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The valid range is 0
to 10 with a default setting of 2 retries.

V-Port This property disables or enables concurrent VPort operation on the

Binding IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client communication channel.

V-Port This is the maximum amount of time the DAPserver™ will wait for a
Timeout response to a VPort message. This property has no effect when the
VPort Binding property is disabled. The valid range is 100 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default of 5000 (5 second).

V-Port This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait when querying from VPort
Connect before cutting off VPort connection. Only one link connection is allowed
for the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle interface, the real-time

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 155

Timeout communication with the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client is
suspended. If there is no communication from the VPort channel, after a
certain timeout, the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client will disconnect
VPort connection and restore the real-time communication. The valid
range is 100 to 3600000 milliseconds with a default of 30000 (30
second).

IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Device

Property The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Device properties are accessed by
Window selecting the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device in the System
Management window. The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Device
property window is shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Device

Device This is the remote device IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle address which
Address must be unique within an IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client when a
multi-drop connection is used. DAPstudio™ uses the Manufacturer,
Device Model, and Device Address to reference a device; for example,
VATech-Duobias:3

Restart This the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range is
Delay 0 to 10000 seconds with a default value of 30 seconds.

Polling AI Refer to 0Analog Input Polling Table for detailed information on the
Tab IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client analog input polling table.

Polling DI This property specifies the period, in seconds, the DAPserver™ poll the
Period IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device for digital inputs. The valid range is 0
to 3600 (one hour) with a default setting of 900.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 156

App Query This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an
Timeout application layer query response. The valid range is 100 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default setting of 1000 (1 second).

Time This is the frequency, entered in seconds, the DAPserver™ time

®
Synchroniza- synchronizes the IEC 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device. The valid range is
tion Period -1 (disable) to 360000000 seconds. This property has no effect when
the Time Sync. Period defined in the Client Application Summary Table
is set to number greater than 0.

Time This property specifies the method used to time synchronize the IEC®
Synchroniza- 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device. The following time synchronization
tion Type methods are available:
• Standard: Use the standard IEC® 60870-5-103 time
synchronization.
• Private: Use the Reyrolle ATddmmyyhhmi (Adjust Relay Time
command) private command time synchronization.

The standard IEC® 60870-5-103 time synchronization supports

millisecond resolution while the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle
method supports minute resolution. The standard IEC® 60870-
5-103 time synchronization is recommended due to the increased
resolution.

Password This property specifies the password used to access the password
protected IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle protected commands. The
DAPserver™ uses the Reyrolle PWxxxx (Password Login) private
command with this property specifying ‘xxxx’.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 157

Communica- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before
tion Fail communication with the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device fails. The
total communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of
automatic retries is 1 to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

Analog Input Polling Table

Property Custom analog input polling requirements can be programmed for each
Window IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device, as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Analog Input

Polling

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Info. ID This property specifies the number used to retrieve the analog input
value form the remote device. The DAPserver™ uses the Reyrolle SMn
(Send Measurand n) private command with this property specifying ‘n’.

Polling AI This property specifies the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device polling
Period interval, for the specified analog input, in milliseconds. The valid range
is 100 to 1000000 with a default setting of 1000 (1 second).

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-51 is
Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-103 Reyrolle device.

Figure 3-51: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Analog Input

I/O Parameters

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 158

 There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Analog
Input I/O Parameters table for each analog input requested from the
IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Measurand This property specifies the measurand number used to retrieve the
Number analog input value form the remote device. The DAPserver™ uses the
Reyrolle SMn (Send Measurand n) private command with this property
specifying ‘n’.

Index This property isolates a specific analog input when the remote device
returns multiple values in a single response.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-52 is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-103 Reyrolle device.

Figure 3-52: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Digital Input I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Digital
Input I/O Parameters table for each digital input requested from the
IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle device.
The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Application Digital Input I/O
Parameters window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-103
Standard Client Application.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-53,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in an IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle
device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 159

 Figure 3-53: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Digital Output
I/O Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Digital
Output I/O Parameters table for each digital output operated in the IEC®
60870-5-103 Reyrolle device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Control ID This property operates in conjunction with the Command Type property
to define the command operation. More information on this property is
included in the Command Type discussion.

Command This property specifies the command used to operate this digital output.
Type The available command types are:
• Relay Control – operate an output relay using the Reyrolle SOn
(Select Output Relay ‘n’) and COn (Close Output Relay ‘n’)
private commands. The Control ID property specifies ‘n’, the
output relay to operate.
• Change Setting Group –change the active setting group using
the Reyrolle CGn (Change to Active Setting Group n) private
command The Control ID property specifies ‘n’, the setting group
number to activate.
• Reset - resets the fascia LEDs and any latched output relays
using the Reyrolle RF (Reset Flags) private command.

Event Point I/O Parameters

Property The Event Point I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-54, is
Window used to operate the event points in an IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle
device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 160

 Figure 3-54: IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Event Point I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Event
Point I/O Parameters table for each event point reported by the IEC®
60870-5-103 Reyrolle device.
The IEC® 60870-5-103 Reyrolle Client Application Event Point I/O
Parameters window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-103
Standard Client Application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 161

IEC® 60870-5-104
Client The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client retrieves information and sends
commands to IEC® 60870-5-104 devices. The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client
can address multiple IEC® 60870-5-104 devices on a single
communication channel.

IEC® 60870-5-104 Protocol Parameter

Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-
Window 104 Client “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Protocol Parameter property
window is shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-55: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Protocol Parameters

App. Layer This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an
Timeout application layer query response. The valid range is 10 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default setting of 4000 (4 seconds).

Len. of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Common Address of
Common ASDU for the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client. Table 3-6 defines the available
Address common addresses for each option: one, two, three or four byte
Common Address of ASDU.
Table 3-6: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Common Address

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 162

 Length of Common Common Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 1 to 254 with 0 and 255
reserved for broadcast common address.
2 bytes The valid range is 1 to 65534 with 0 and
65535 reserved for broadcast common
address.
3 bytes The valid range is 1 to 16777214 with 0
and 16777215 reserved for broadcast
common address.
4 bytes The valid range is 1 to 4294967294 with 0
and 4294967295 reserved for broadcast
common address.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Cause of Transmission
COT (COT) field. The Cause of Transmission can be one or two bytes.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Information Object
Info. Object Address for the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client. Table 3-7 defines the
Address available information object addresses for each option: one, two, three,
or four-byte addresses.
Table 3-7: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Information Object
Address
Length of Info Object Information Object Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 0 to 255.
2 bytes The valid range is 0 to 65535.
3 bytes The valid range is 0 to 16777215.
4 bytes The valid range is 0 to 4294967295.

K This property specifies the maximum number of unconfirmed

information frames that the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client can buffer. The
valid range is 1 to 32767 with a default setting of 12 information frames.

W This property specifies the maximum number of information frames the

IEC® 60870-5-104 Client can receive before an acknowledgement must
be sent to the remote device. The valid range is 1 to 32767 with a
default setting of 8 information frames. This property cannot exceed
two-thirds of K.

Integrity This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™

Interval does an integrity poll with the IEC® 60870-5-104 device. The valid
range is 0 to 86400000 (1 day), with a default of 0 (integrity scan only

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 163

 during a device restart). Decreasing the polling frequency decreases
the data update time and increases the available communication
bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less than or equal to
the desired maximum data update time.

Transmission This property specifies® the method used by the DAPserver™ to read
of Integrated counters from the IEC 60870-5-104 device. The following methods are
Totals supported for reading the counter data:
• Disable – Counters are not read from the IEC® 60870-5-104
device.
• Mode A - The IEC® 60870-5-104 device performs a local freeze
and uses unsolicited messaging to report the counter data.
• Mode B - The IEC® 60870-5-104 device performs a local freeze,
the DAPserver™ polls for the counter data. The period that
DAPserver™ polls the counter data from the IEC® 60870-5-104
device is defined as the Counter Info Group.
• Mode C - The DAPserver™ issues a freeze and polls the IEC®
60870-5-104 device for the counter data.
• Mode D - The DAPserver™ issues a freeze while the IEC®
60870-5-104 device uses unsolicited messaging to report the
counter data.

Counter This property specifies the frequency, in seconds; the DAPserver™

Freeze freezes the IEC® 60870-5-104 device counters. The valid range is 10 to
Period 3600, with a default of 30 seconds. Decreasing the freezing frequency
increases the available communication bandwidth.

Counter This property operates in conjunction with the Transmission of

Reset Integrated Totals property. When enabled, a counter reset is sent to the
remote device after the counter values are read. The counter reset is
not sent when the Transmission of Integrated Totals specifies
unsolicited reporting of the counter values.

Time Sync. This is the frequency, in seconds, the DAPserver™ time synchronizes
Period the IEC® 60870-5-104 device. The valid range is 1 to 3600000 seconds
and –1 (disable), which is the default setting. This property has no effect
when the broadcast time synchronization is enabled in the Client
Application Summary table.

Group Info. Refer to Group Info for detailed information on the IEC® 60870-5-104
Client Group Information table.

Counter Refer to Counter Group Info for detailed information on the IEC® 60870-
Group Info. 5-104 Client Counter Group Information table.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 164

Negative This property specifies the format the IEC® 60870-5-104 device will use
Number when reporting negative values. The default setting (Complementary) is
Format the more commonly used two’s complement format. The alternate,
Direct setting sets the most significant sign bit to 1.

Sequence This property enables or disables the sequence number checking of the
Check frames received from the remote device. The default setting is enable
(Yes) and should only be changed for unique vendor implementations
that do not use this feature.

Send Stop This property enables or disables the transmission of stop frames to the
Frame remote device. The default setting is enable (Yes) and should only be
changed for unique vendor implementations that do not recognize stop
frames.

Time Format This property specifies the time used by the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client to
time synchronize the device. The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client will use
either UTC or local time.

Originator This property specifies the Originator Address, which is only used when
the Cause of Transmission is 2 bytes (see Length of COT).

Select This is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and operate
Timeouts command sent by a Server application to this Client application. The
valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 30 seconds.

IEC® 60870-5-104 Device

Property The IEC® 60870-5-104 Device properties are accessed by selecting the
Window IEC® 60870-5-104 device in the System Management window. The
IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Device property window is shown in Figure
3-56.

Figure 3-56: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Device

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 165

Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communic- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

ation Fail communication with the IEC® 60870-5-104 device fails. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The valid range of
automatic retries is 1 to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

Group Info
Property The Group info definition table, shown in Figure 3-57, is used to define
Window the object groups retrieved from an IEC® 60870-5-104 device.

Figure 3-57: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Group Info

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Group Info table for
each group requested from the IEC® 60870-5-104 device. A maximum
of 16 records (object groups) is permitted per IEC® 60870-5-104 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 166

 The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Group Info window and
properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Application.

Counter Group Info

Property The Group info definition table, shown in Figure 3-58, is used to define
Window the counter groups retrieved from an IEC® 60870-5-104 device.

Figure 3-58: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Counter Group Info

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Counter Group Info
table for each counter group requested from the IEC® 60870-5-104
device. A maximum of four records (counter groups) is permitted per
IEC® 60870-5-104 device.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Counter Group Info window
and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Application.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-59 is
Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-104 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 167

 Figure 3-59: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Analog Input I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Analog Input I/O
Parameters table for each analog input requested from the IEC® 60870-
5-104 device.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Analog Input I/O Parameters
and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client Application.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-60 is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from an IEC®
60870-5-104 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 168

 Figure 3-60: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Digital Input I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Digital Input I/O
Parameters table for each digital input requested from the IEC® 60870-
5-104 device.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Digital Input I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client
Application.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-61
Window is used to specify the counter inputs retrieved from an IEC® 60870-5-
104 device.

Figure 3-61: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Counter I/O
Parameters table for each counter requested from the IEC® 60870-5-
104 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 169

 The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Counter I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client
Application.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-62,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in an IEC® 60870-5-104 device.

Figure 3-62: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Analog Output I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Analog Output I/O
Parameters table for each analog output set in the IEC® 60870-5-104
device.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Analog Output I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client
Application.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-63,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in an IEC® 60870-5-104 device.

Figure 3-63: IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Digital Output I/O

Parameters

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 170

 There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Digital Output I/O
Parameters table for each digital output operated in the IEC® 60870-5-
104 device.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Client Application Digital Output I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Client
Application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 171

DNP 3
Client The DNP 3 Client retrieves information and sends commands to DNP 3
devices. The DNP 3 Client can address multiple DNP 3 devices on a
single communication channel.
The DNP 3 Client supports multiple communication channels to
a single device; however, unsolicited messaging must be
disabled in the remote device.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the DNP 3 Client
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
DNP 3 Client Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-64.

Figure 3-64: DNP 3 Client Protocol Parameters

Data Link This is the maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, the DNP 3 Client
Confirm waits for a data link confirmation. If the confirm does not arrive within
Timeout the Data Link Confirm Timeout, the DNP 3 Client retries up to the
number of Max Data Link Retries. The valid range is 100 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default setting of 2000 (2 seconds).

Max Data This property is the number of retries when a data link confirm is not
Link Retries received from the DNP 3 device. One communication failure occurs
when a valid response is not received for the total retries specified in
this property. The total communication attempts performed is one
greater than this value, which equates to the initial attempt plus the
retries. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default setting of 0 (disable
retries).

Source This property specifies the Source Address of the DNP 3 Client and is

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 172

Address used for the data link frame. The valid range of Source Addresses is 0
to 65535 with a default of 1.

DIR Check When enabled the DNP 3 Client checks the DIR (physical transmission
direction) bit in the control field. Some DNP 3 devices do not reverse
the DIR bit when responding, for these cases DIR checking is set to
“Disable”.

DNP 3 Device
Property The DNP 3 Device properties are accessed by selecting the DNP 3
Window device in the System Management window. The DNP 3 Client Device
property window is shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-65: DNP 3 Client Device

Device This is the remote device DNP 3 address which must be unique within a
Address DNP 3 Client when a multi-drop connection is used. DAPstudio™ uses
the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device Address to reference a
device; for example, SEL-SEL351S:3

Restart This property is the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The
Delay valid range is 0 to 100000 seconds with a default value of 30.

App. Layer This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an
Response application layer confirmation. The valid range is 100 to 100000
Timeouts milliseconds with a default setting of 4000 (4 second).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 173

App. Layer This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an
Confirm application layer confirmation. The valid range is 100 to 100000
Timeouts milliseconds with a default setting of 4000 (4 second).

Application This property specifies the maximum number of retries for the
Layer application layer when a valid application query response is not
Retries received. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default setting of 0 (disable
retries).

Time Sync. This property is independent of the Time Sync Command in the polling
Method table and specifies the time synchronization method.
• No Time Sync – Automated time synchronization of this DNP 3
device is disabled.
• Time Sync on Time Change - The DNP 3 Client automatically
time synchronizes the DNP 3 device when the DAPserver™
system time is changed.
• Time Sync Based on IIN - The DNP 3 Client automatically time
synchronizes when the DNP 3 device sets the time
synchronization bit in the Internal Indications.
• Auto Time Sync – The DNP 3 Client automatically time
synchronizes when the DNP 3 device sets the time
synchronization bit in the Internal Indications or the DAPserver™
system time is changed.

Feedback This property specifies the delay, in milliseconds, to wait after a control
Poll Delay operation for a feedback poll. The valid range is 0 to 100000000 with a
default setting of 0 (disable feedback poll).

Device Poll Refer to 0DNP 3 Polling Table for detailed information on the DNP 3
Table Client polling table.

Auto This property enables or disables automatic integrity polls. When

Integrity Poll enabled the DNP 3 Client automatically issues an integrity poll to the
DNP 3 device whenever the data link is reconnected. The default
setting is enabled.

Select This property is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and
Timeouts operate command sent by a Server application to this Client application.
The valid range is 1 to 100000 seconds with a default setting of 30
seconds.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 174

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in
Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communic- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

ation Fail communication with the DNP 3 device is considered failed. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of
automatic retries is 1 to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

DNP 3 Polling Table

Property Custom polling requirements can be programmed for each DNP 3
Window device, as shown in Figure 3-66.

Figure 3-66: DNP 3 Client Polling Table

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Poll Data The following data types are supported:

Type • Class 1, 2, and 3 poll
• Time synchronization
• Integrity poll
• Class 0 data poll
• Class 1 data poll
• Class 2 data poll
• Class 3 data poll
• Binary input, binary input change or binary input integrity poll

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 175

 • Binary output poll
• Binary counter, frozen counter, binary counter change, frozen
counter change, binary counter integrity, or frozen counter
integrity poll
• Analog input, analog input change, or analog input integrity poll
• 32-bit analog input with flag, without flag, with time, without time
poll

Qualifier This property specifies the points associated with this poll. The following
are supported:
• All Points – All of the points specified by Poll Data Type are
polled. The Start Point and Number of Points properties are not
used.
• Quantity/Range of Points – Only the specified points are polled.
The Start Point and Number of Points properties specify the
range of points.

Start Point This property specifies the first point index this polling record is applied
to and is only used when the Qualifier specifies a range of points. The
Start Point property operates in conjunction with Number of Points to
specify a range of points. The valid range is 0 to 255 with a default
setting of 0.

Number of This is the number of points, starting with the point index specified in
Points Start Point; this polling record is applied to and is only used when the
Qualifier specifies a range of points. The valid range is 0 to 10000000
with a default setting of 1.

Poll Interval This property specifies the DNP 3 device polling interval, for the
specified data type, in milliseconds. The valid range is 10 to
31536000000 milliseconds (1 year) with a default setting of 1000.

DNP 3 Device Pseudo Points

Overview The following sections describe the Client Device Pseudo Points
specific to the DNP 3 Client.

IIN Restart This pseudo digital input is set when the DNP 3 device Internal
Bit state Indication reports that it has restarted. The DNP 3 Client resets this bit
by explicitly writing a 0 into this bit of the Internal Indications object in
the DNP 3 device.

IIN Trouble This pseudo digital input is set when the DNP 3 device reports an
abnormal condition.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 176

Bit state

IIN Local This pseudo digital input is set when one or more digital outputs are not
State Bit available in the DNP 3 device and clear when all of the digital outputs
state are available.

IIN Event This pseudo digital input is set when the DNP 3 device reports that an
Buffer Bit event buffer or application buffer has overflowed.
state

IIN This pseudo digital input is set when the DNP 3 device Internal
Configuration Indication reports the current configuration is corrupt. The available
Corrupt Bit functionality in the DNP 3 device is severely limited until a valid
state configuration is downloaded.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-67 is
Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from a DNP 3
device.

Figure 3-67: DNP 3 Client Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Client Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input requested from the DNP 3 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point Index This property specifies the point index where this analog input is located
in the DNP 3 device. The valid range is 0 to 4294967295 with a default
setting of 0.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 177

Digital Input I/O Parameters
Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-68 is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from a DNP 3
device.

Figure 3-68: DNP 3 Client Digital Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Client Digital Input I/O Parameters
table for each digital input requested form the DNP 3 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point Index This property specifies the point index where this digital input is located
in the DNP 3 device. The valid range is 0 to 4294967295 with a default
setting of 0.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-69
Window is used to specify the counter inputs retrieved from a DNP 3 device.

Figure 3-69: DNP 3 Client Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Client Counter I/O Parameters table
for each counter requested form the DNP 3 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 178

Object No. This is the DNP 3 Object expected when the counter is reported by the
DNP 3 device. The following counter objects are supported:
• Binary counter (DNP 3 object code 20)
• Frozen counter (DNP 3 object code 21)

The Object and following Point Index are maintained with the
information reported by the DNP 3 device. All variations
matching the Object and Point Index are mapped to this
counter.

Point Index This property specifies the point index where this counter is located in
the DNP 3 device. The valid range is 0 to 4294967295 with a default
setting of 0.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-70
Window is used to operate the analog outputs in a DNP 3 device.

Figure 3-70: DNP 3 Client Analog Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Client Analog Output I/O Parameters
table for each analog output set in the DNP 3 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point Index This property specifies the point index where this analog output is
located in the DNP 3 device. The valid range is 0 to 4294967295 with a
default setting of 0.

Data Length This property specifies the type of analog output: 16-bit or 32-bit.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 179

Digital Output I/O Parameters
Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-71
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in a DNP 3 device.

Figure 3-71: DNP 3 Client Digital Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Client Digital Output I/O Parameters
table for each digital output operated in the DNP 3 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point Index This property specifies the point index where this digital output is
located in the DNP 3 device. The valid range is 0 to 4294967295 with a
default setting of 0.

Control The digital output can be operated as a Trip/Close, Latch or Pulse

Method output. A Pulse output may operate the output multiple times.

Count This is the number of times the output is operated when the Control
Method is set to Pulse. The valid range is 1 to 1000 with a default of 1
(single operation).

On-time This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is on. This property is
only applicable to Pulse and Trip/Close controls. The valid range is 1 to
100000 milliseconds with a default value of 1000 milliseconds.

Off-time This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is off. This property is
only applicable to Pulse and Trip/Close controls. The valid range is 1 to
100000 milliseconds with a default value of 1000 milliseconds.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 180

Modbus
Client The Modbus Client retrieves information and sends commands to the
Modbus devices. The Modbus Client can address multiple Modbus
devices on a single communication channel.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the Modbus Client
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
Modbus Client Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-72.

Figure 3-72: Modbus Client Protocol Parameters

Framing This property specifies the Modbus framing method: serial (RTU or
Method ASCII) or TCP/IP. The default is Modbus RTU which is the most
commonly used serial implementation.

Transaction This property is used for transaction pairing. The Modbus device returns
Identifier the Transaction Identifier it received in the request. The valid range is 0
to 255 with a default of 0.

VPort This property will enable concurrent VPort operation on the Modbus
Binding Client communication channel.

VPort This is the maximum amount of time the DAPserver™ will wait for a
Timeout response to a VPort message. This property has no effect when the
VPort property is disabled. The valid range is 100 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default of 1000 (1 second).

Modbus Device
Property The Modbus Device properties are accessed by selecting the Modbus
Window device in the System Management window. The Modbus Client Device
property window is shown in Figure 3-73.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 181

 Figure 3-73: Modbus Client Device

Device This is the remote device Modbus address which must be unique within
Address a Modbus Client when a multi-drop connection is used. DAPstudio™
uses the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device Address to reference
a device; for example, GE-F650:3.

Restart This is the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range
Delay is 0 to 100000 seconds with a default value of 30 seconds.

Period for This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds; the DAPserver™
Class 1 Data polls the Modbus device for the Class 1 data. The valid range is 10 to
100000, with a default of 500. Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the Class 1 data update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less
than or equal to the desired maximum Class 1 data update time.

Period for This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds; the DAPserver™
Class 2 Data polls the Modbus device for the Class 2 data. The valid range is 10 to
100000, with a default of 1000. Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the Class 2 data update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property is usually set to a value
greater than or the Period for Class 1 Data.

Period for This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds; the DAPserver™

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 182

Class 3 Data polls the Modbus device for the Class 3 data. The valid range is 10 to
100000, with a default of 10000. Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the Class 3 data update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property is usually set to a value
greater than or the Period for Class 2 Data.

Retry Times This property specifies the number of retries attempted when a valid
response is not received from the Modbus device. One communication
failure occurs when a valid response is not received for the total retries
specified in this property. The total communication attempts are one
greater than this value, which equates to the initial attempt plus the
retries. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default setting of 0 (disable
retries).

Polling This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait for the Modbus device to
Timeout respond to a query. The valid range is 10 to 1000000 milliseconds with
a default setting of 1000.

Select This is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and operate
Timeout command sent by a Server application to this Client application. The
valid range is 1 to 1000000 seconds with a default setting of 30
seconds.

Time Sync. This is the frequency, entered in seconds; the DAPserver™ time
Period synchronizes the Modbus device. The valid range is -1 to 360000
seconds and “Disable” (default setting). This property has no effect
when the Broadcast Time Sync. Periods defined in the Client
Application Summary Table is set to a number greater than 0.
This property is only applicable to Modbus devices with custom
support built into the Modbus Client. The list of Modbus devices
the DAPserver™ can time synchronize, using the Modbus
communication protocol, is found in the DAPserver™ Technical
Reference Manual.

Period for This property specifies the time, in milliseconds; the DAPserver™ polls
Reading the Modbus device for SOE information. The valid range is 100 to
SOE 1000000 milliseconds with a default setting of 1000.

This property is only applicable to Modbus devices with custom

support built into the Modbus Client. The list of Modbus devices
the DAPserver™ can retrieve time stamped information from,
using the Modbus communication protocol, is found in the DAPserver™
Technical Reference Manual.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus device returns 2 byte
for 2 Byte values. The order can be Most Significant Byte first (21) or Least

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 183

Data Significant Byte first (12). The default setting is the more commonly
used Most Significant Byte first.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus device returns 3 byte
for 3 Byte values. The default setting is the more commonly used Most Significant
Data Byte first.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus device returns 4 byte
for 4 Byte integer values. The default setting is the more commonly used Most
Integer Data Significant Byte first.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus device returns
for Floating floating point values. The default setting is the more commonly used
Value Most Significant Byte first.

Maximum This property specifies the maximum number of consecutive coils or

Digitals in a discrete inputs the DAPserver™ can return to a Read Coils (function
Response code 1) or Read Discrete Inputs (function code 2) request. The valid
range is 1 to 2000, with a default setting of 2000. Modification of this
setting is required to accommodate hosts that cannot receive 2000
digitals in a single response.

Maximum This property specifies the maximum number of consecutive registers

Registers in the DAPserver™ can return in a response to a Read Input Registers
a Response (function code 4) or Read Holding Registers (function code 3) request.
The valid range is 1 to 125, with a default setting of 125. Modification of
this setting is required to accommodate hosts that cannot receive 125
registers in a single response.

Maximum This property specifies the maximum number of consecutive coils that
Coil Write can be written to the Modbus device using Write Multiple Coils (function
code 15). The valid range is 1 to 800, with a default setting of 800.

Maximum This property specifies the maximum number of consecutive registers

Register that can be written to the Modbus device using Write Multiple Registers
Write (function code 16). The valid range is 1 to 100, with a default setting of
100.

Data Bytes This property specifies the number of bytes per register returned by the
per Register Modbus device. The valid settings are 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes per register.
The default setting is 2 bytes per register which is the most commonly
used register size.

Vendor This property specifies the special parameter 1 for the IED.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 184

Parameter 1

Vendor This property specifies the special parameter 2 for the IED.
Parameter 2

Channel This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before the two redundant
Status channel statuses are combined to calculate the channel status.
Calculation
Delay

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communica- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

tion Fail communication with the Modbus device is failed. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater than this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of
automatic retries is 0 (disable retries) to 10000. The default setting is 3
retries.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-74 is
Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from a
Modbus device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 185

 Figure 3-74: Modbus Client Analog Input I/O Parameters
There is one record in the Modbus Client Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input requested from the Modbus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Function This is the Modbus function code used to retrieve the analog inputs
Code from the Modbus device. The following function codes are supported:
• Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Check the device Modbus implementation to determine which function

code is supported.

Address This property specifies the starting register address where this analog
input is located in the Modbus device. An analog input may span more
than one register; one or more analog inputs may share a single
register. The range is 0 to 65535 for the two byte Modbus register
address.

Start Byte This property specifies the starting byte of this analog input within the
starting register and is only applicable when two analog inputs share a
single register and there is more than one byte per register. The Start
Byte can be set to the first (1), second (2), third (3) or not used (0). The
valid range is 0 to 31 with a default setting of 0.

Priority The retrieval of Modbus device information can be prioritized using the
Class polling concept. The Modbus Client supports 3 classes, each with
an independent polling schedule and register assignment. This property

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 186

 is used to assign the analog input to a Modbus Client class: class 1, 2,
or 3.
The concept of class data is not defined within the Modbus
definition, this function is a DAPserver™ Modbus Client
enhancement.

Data Length This property specifies the size of the retrieved analog input, in bytes.
The Start Byte and Data Length will be used to calculate how many
registers are required to receive the Analog Input value from the
Modbus device.

Register This property indicates the data format the Modbus device will use to
Value report the analog input value. The following analog input formats are
available:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Short floating point
• Binary Coded Decimal
• ASCII & BCD ASCII
• Modulo 1000, 10000 or Modicon (65536)

Digital Input I/O Parameters

The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-75 is
used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from a Modbus
device.

Figure 3-75: Modbus Client Digital Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Client Digital Input I/O Parameters

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 187

 table for each digital input requested from the Modbus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Function This is the Modbus function code used to retrieve the digital inputs from
Code the Modbus device. The following function codes are supported:
• Read coil status (Modbus function code 1)
• Read discrete input status (Modbus function code 2)
• Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)
• Read exception status (Modbus function code 7)

Check the device Modbus implementation to determine which function

code is supported.

Address For the Read Coil Status and Read Discrete Input Status function
codes, this property specifies the Modbus register containing the digital
input. The range is 0 to 65535 for the two byte Modbus register
address.
For the Read Exception Status function code this property specifies the
exception output associated with the digital input. The least significant
exception output is referenced using address 0, the most significant
using address 7.
For the Read Holding Registers and Read Input Registers function code
this property specifies the register containing the digital input. The
Address is used in conjunction with the Offset to identify the digital input
within the register.

Bit Position This property, applicable for the Read Holding Register and Read Input
Register Function Codes, specifies the bit position of the digital input.
The least significant bit in a Modbus register is offset 0, while the most
significant bit is offset 15. The valid range is 0 to 31 with a default
setting of 0.

Priority The retrieval of Modbus device information can be prioritized using the
Class polling concept. The Modbus Client supports 3 classes, each with
an independent polling schedule and register assignment. This property
is used to assign the digital input to a Modbus Client class: class 1, 2, or
3.
The concept of class data is not defined within the Modbus
definition, this function is a DAPserver™ Modbus Client

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 188

 enhancement.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-76
Window is used to specify the counter inputs retrieved from a Modbus device.

Figure 3-76: Modbus Client Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Client Counter I/O Parameters table
for each counter requested from the Modbus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Function This is the Modbus function code used to retrieve the counters from the
Code Modbus device. The following function codes are supported:
• Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Check the device Modbus implementation to determine which function

code is supported.

Address This property specifies the starting register address where this counter
is located. A counter may span more than one register; one or more
counters may share a single register. The range is 0 to 65535 for the
two byte Modbus register address.

Start Byte This property specifies the starting byte of this counter within in the
starting register and is only applicable when two counters share a single
register and there is more than one byte per register. The Start Byte
can be set to the first (1), second (2), third (3) or not used (0).

Priority The retrieval of Modbus device information can be prioritized using the
Class polling concept. The Modbus Client supports 3 classes, each with
an independent polling schedule and register assignment. This property
is used to assign the counter to a Modbus Client class: class 1, 2, or 3.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 189

 The concept of class data is not defined within the Modbus
definition, this function is a DAPserver™ Modbus Client
enhancement.

Data Length This property specifies the size of the counter, in bytes. The Start Byte
and Data Length will be used to calculate how many registers are
required to report the Counter value.

Register This property indicates the data format the Modbus device will use to
Value report the counter value. The following counter formats are available:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Short floating point
• Binary Coded Decimal
• ASCII & BDC ASCII
• Modulo 1000, 10000 or Modicon (65536)

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-77
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in a Modbus device.

Figure 3-77: Modbus Client Analog Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Client Analog Output I/O Parameters
table for each analog output set in the Modbus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Feedback This is the Modbus function code used to retrieve the analog outputs
Function from the Modbus device. The following function codes are supported:
Code • Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 190

 • Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Check the device Modbus implementation to determine which function

code is supported.

Address This property specifies the starting register address where this analog
output is located. An analog output may span more than one register;
one or more analog outputs may share a single register. The range is 0
to 65535 for the two byte Modbus register address.

Start Byte This property specifies the starting byte of this analog output within in
the starting register and is only applicable when two analog outputs
share a single register and there is more than one byte per register. The
Start Byte can be set to the first (1), second (2), third (3) or not used (0).

Priority The retrieval of Modbus device information can be prioritized using the
Class polling concept. The Modbus Client supports 3 classes, each with
an independent polling schedule and register assignment. This property
is used to assign the analog output to a Modbus Client class: class 1, 2,
or 3.
The concept of class data is not defined within the Modbus
definition, this function is a DAPserver™ Modbus Client
enhancement.

Data Length This property specifies the size of the analog output, in bytes. The Start
Byte and Data Length will used to calculate how many registers are
required to report and set the Analog Output value.

Register This property indicates the data format the Modbus device will accept
Value when updating the analog output value. The following analog output
formats are available:
• Discrete
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Short floating point
• Binary Coded Decimal
• ASCII & BCD ASCII
• Modulo 1000, 10000 or Modicon (65536)

Write This is the Modbus function code used to set the analog outputs in the
Function Modbus device. The following function codes are supported:
Code • Write single register (Modbus function code 6)
• Write multiple registers (Modbus function code 16HEX)

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 191

Digital Output I/O Parameters
Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-78
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in a Modbus device.

Figure 3-78: Modbus Client Digital Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Client Digital Output I/O Parameters
table for each digital output operated in the Modbus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Function This is the Modbus function code used to operate the digital outputs in
Code the Modbus device. The following function codes are supported:
• Force single coil (Modbus function code 5)
• Write single register (Modbus function code 6)
• Write multiple registers (Modbus function code 16HEX)

Address For the Write Single Coil function code this property specifies the
Modbus register containing the digital output. The range is 0 to 65535
for the two byte Modbus register address.
For the Write Single Register and Write Multiple Registers function
codes this property specifies the register containing the digital output.
The Address is used in conjunction with the Offset to identify the digital
output within the register.

Bit Position This property, applicable for the Write Single Register and Write
Multiple Registers Function Codes, specifies the bit position of the
digital output. The least significant bit in a Modbus register is offset 0,
while the most significant bit is offset 15. The valid range is 0 to 31 with
a default setting of 0.

Control The digital output can be operated as a Trip/Close or Pulse output. A

Method Pulse output may operate the output multiple times which is specified in
the Count.

Count This is the number of times the output is operated when the Control

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 192

 Method is set to Pulse. The valid range is 1 to 100 with a default of 1
(single operation) and specifies the number of times the Modbus Client
will operate the digital output.

On-time This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is on. This property is
only applicable to Pulse controls. The valid range is 1 to 10000
milliseconds with a default value of 100 milliseconds.

Off-time This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is off. This property is
only applicable to Pulse controls. The valid range is 1 to 10000
milliseconds with a default value of 100 milliseconds.

Feedback DI This property is used to specify the corresponding digital input used to
report the state of this digital output.
The digital output state is retrieved using the Read Coil Status
(function code 1) command.

Event Point I/O Parameters

Property The Event Point I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-79 is
Window used to specify the event points retrieved from a Modbus device.

Figure 3-79: Modbus Client Event Point I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Client Event Point I/O Parameters
table for each event point requested from the Modbus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Event Code This property specifies the remote device event code associated with
this event point. A value of -1 disables this function. Table 3-8
summarizes the remote devices supported by the DAPserver™. The
valid range is 0 to 65535 with a default setting of 0.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 193

 Table 3-8: Modbus Évent Point Devices
Manufacturer Model Event Code
745 Transformer Data format F24 in the 745
Management Relay Communications Guide.
750/760 Feeder Data format F24 in the
Management Relay 750/760 Communications
Guide.

Value This property specifies the method used to determine the state of this
Defined by point. The following methods are supported:
this Event
• Define by the frame – The state is defined by the received frame.
• Open – The state is set to open (logical 0) when this event is
received.
• Close – The state is set to closed (logical 1) when this event is
received.

DI Bind With This property specifies the digital input associated with this event.
this Event

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 194

Courier
Client The Courier Client retrieves information and sends commands to
Courier devices. The Courier Client can address multiple Courier
devices on a single communication channel.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the Courier Client
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
Courier Client Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-80.

Figure 3-80: Courier Client Protocol Parameters

Link Layer This property specifies the interface to the Courier device. Currently the
DAPserver™ Courier Client supports the IEC870 which requires an
Areva KITZ to communicate with DAPserver™ and K-Bus interface

V-Port This property will enable concurrent VPort operation on the Courier
Binding Client communication channel.

V-Port This is the maximum amount of time, in milliseconds; the DAPserver™

Timeout will wait for a response to a VPort message. This property has no effect
when the VPort Binding property is disabled. The valid range is 100 to
3600000 milliseconds with a default of 1000 (1 second).

V-Port This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait when querying from VPort
Connect before cutting off VPort connection. Only one link connection is allowed
Timeout for the Courier interface, the real-time communication with the Courier
Client is suspended. If there is no communication from the VPort
channel, after a certain timeout, the Courier Client will disconnect VPort
connection and restore the real-time communication. The valid range is
100 to 10000000 milliseconds with a default setting of 10000.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 195

Courier Device
Property The Courier Device properties are accessed by selecting the Courier
Window device in the System Management window. The Courier Client Device
property window is shown in Figure 3-81.

Figure 3-81: Courier Client Device

Device This is the remote device Courier address which must be unique within
Address a Courier Client when a multi-drop connection is used. DAPstudio™
uses the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device Address to reference
a device; for example, AREVA-KCEG142:3

Restart This the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range is
Delay 0 to 3600 seconds with a default value of 30.

Time Sync. This is the frequency, in seconds; the DAPserver™ time synchronizes
Period the Courier device. The valid range is 1 to 32767 seconds with a default
of -1 (disable). This property has no effect when the Time Sync Period
defined in the Courier Device Application Summary Table is set to
number greater than 0.

Polling Tab Refer to Courier Polling Table for detailed information on the Courier
Client polling table.

Query This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait for the Courier device to
Timeout respond to a query. The valid range is 0 to 65535 milliseconds with a
default setting of 1000.

Check CB This property enables or disables the circuit breaker position checking

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 196

Error before sending remote control. When enabled, before sending any
circuit breaker trip/close command to remote device, the Courier Client
will first read the circuit breaker position and check if there is a circuit
breaker position error. If an error is detected, the command is not
issued to the Courier device.

Select This is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and operate
Timeout command sent by a Server application to this Client application. The
valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 30 seconds.

Polling Rate This is the minimum time, in milliseconds, between two “Polling Plant
Status” commands. The valid range is 100 to 3600000 with a default
setting of 200 milliseconds.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communica- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

tion Fail communication with the Courier device fails. The total communication
attempts performed is one greater than this value, which equates to the
initial attempt plus the retries. The valid range of automatic retries is 1
to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

Courier Polling Table

Property Custom polling requirements can be programmed for each Courier
Window device, as shown in Figure 3-82.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 197

 Figure 3-82: Courier Client Polling Table

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Col No This property specifies the column of the Courier menu cell this polling
record is applied to. The valid range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of
0.
The Col No, Row No, and Total Rows collectively define the Courier
menu cells. Consider the following settings:
• Col No = 1
• Row No = 5
• Total Rows = 2

The Courier Client will poll the Courier device for menu cells (row 5,
column 1) and (row 6, column 1).

Start Row This property specifies the first row of the Courier menu cells this polling
record is applied to. The Row No operates in conjunction with the Total
Rows to specify a range of menu cell rows. The valid range is 0 to 255
with a default setting of 0.

Total Rows This is the number of menu cell rows, starting with the row specified in
Start Row, this polling record is applied to. The valid range is 1 to 10
with a default setting of 1.

Poll Interval This property specifies the Courier device polling interval, for the
specified data type, in milliseconds. The valid range is 100 to
31536000000 milliseconds (1 year) with a default setting of 1000.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-83 is

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 198

Window used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from a Courier
device.

Figure 3-83: Courier Client Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Courier Client Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input requested from the Courier device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Col No This is the column of the cell containing the analog input information.
The Courier Client uses the Col No in conjunction with the Row No to
reference the analog input in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Row No This is the row of the cell containing the analog input information. The
Courier Client uses the Row No in conjunction with the Col No to
reference the analog input in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-84 is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from a Courier
device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 199

 Figure 3-84: Courier Client Digital Input I/O Parameters
There is one record in the Courier Client Digital Input I/O Parameters
table for each digital input requested from the Courier device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Col No This is the column of the cell containing the digital input information.
The Courier Client uses the Col No in conjunction with the Row No to
reference the digital input in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Row No This is the row of the cell containing the digital input information. The
Courier Client uses the Row No in conjunction with the Col No to
reference the digital input in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Bit Position This is the bit position, within the menu cell contents, of the digital input.
For single point digital inputs, specify the Bit position in the byte value.
For double point digital inputs, specify the first (lower order) bit in the
byte value

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Window The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-85
Property is used to operate the digital outputs in a Courier device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 200

 Figure 3-85: Courier Client Analog Output I/O Parameters
There is one record in the Courier Client Analog Output I/O Parameters
table for each analog output set in the Courier device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Col No This is the column of the cell containing the analog output information.
The Courier Client uses the Col No in conjunction with the Row No to
reference the analog output in the Courier device. The valid range is 0
to 255 with a default setting of 0.

Row No This is the row of the cell containing the analog output information. The
Courier Client uses the Row No in conjunction with the Col No to
reference the analog output in the Courier device. The valid range is 0
to 255 with a default setting of 0.

Bit Position This is the bit position, within the menu cell contents, of the analog
output. This property has no effect for setting value other than discrete.
The valid range is -1 to 255 with a default setting of -1.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-86
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in a Courier device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 201

 Figure 3-86: Courier Client Digital Output I/O Parameters
There is one record in the Courier Client Digital Output I/O Parameters
table for each digital output operated in the Courier device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Col No This is the column of the cell containing the digital output information.
The Courier Client uses the Col No in conjunction with the Row No to
reference the digital output in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Row No This is the row of the cell containing the digital output information. The
Courier Client uses the Row No in conjunction with the Col No to
reference the digital output in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

CB/Set For a Circuit Breaker or Isolator control, specify the Circuit Breaker
Group No number, range 1 to 3. To change an active setting group, specify the
target setting group no. For other output, this property has no effect.

Isolator For Circuit Breaker control, specify the Isolator No to 0. For an Isolator
specifies the Isolator No associated with the Circuit Breaker, range 1 to
3. For other output, this property has no effect.
The following table outlines the combinations of the above parameters
to identify the different output objects and setting group.

Col No Row No CB/Set Isolator No

Group No
Circuit Breaker Trip/close /
operation
Isolator Trip/Close /
Setting Group /
Change

If the Col No=0, Row No=10HEX and Isolator=0, the Courier Client will
consider any control on this digital output is Circuit Breaker trip/close. If
the Col No=0, Row No=10 HEX and Isolator>0, the Courier Client will
consider any control on this digital output is Isolator trip/close. If the Col

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 202

 No=0, Row No=0E HEX, the Courier Client will consider any control on
this digital output is switch setting group.
Other Col and Row No will be considered as normal Write Cell
command.

Event Point I/O Parameters

Window The Event Point I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-87 is
Property used to specify the event points retrieved from a Courier device.

Figure 3-87: Courier Client Event Point I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Courier Client Event Point I/O Parameters
table for each event point requested from the Courier device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Col No This is the column of the cell containing the event point information. The
Courier Client uses the Col No in conjunction with the Row No to
reference the event point in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Row No This is the row of the cell containing the event point information. The
Courier Client uses the Row No in conjunction with the Col No to
reference the event point in the Courier device. The valid range is 0 to
255 with a default setting of 0.

Bit Position This is the bit position, within the menu cell contents, of the event point.
The valid range is 0 to 31 with a default setting of 0.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 203

SPA-Bus
Client The SPA-Bus Client retrieves information and sends commands to
SPA-Bus devices. The SPA-Bus Client can address multiple SPA-Bus
devices on a single communication channel.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the SPA-Bus Client
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
SPA-Bus Client Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-88.

Figure 3-88: SPA-Bus Client Protocol Parameters

Broadcast This property specifies the format used for a broadcast time
Time Sync. synchronization command. The following options are available:
Format • ss.sss
• yy-mm-dd hh.mm.ss.sss
• Both – The SPA-Bus Client send a time synchronization using
yy-mm-dd hh.mm.ss.sss followed by another time
synchronization command using ss.sss.

V-Port This property will enable concurrent VPort operation on the SPA-Bus
Binding Client communication channel.

V-Port This is the maximum amount of time the DAPserver™ will wait for a
Timeout response to a VPort message. This property has no effect when the
VPort Binding property is disabled. The valid range is 100 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default of 1000 (1 second).

SPA-Bus Device
Property The SPA-Bus Device properties are accessed by selecting the SPA-
Window Bus device in the System Management window. The SPA-Bus Client
Device property window is shown in Figure 3-89.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 204

 Figure 3-89: SPA-Bus Client Device

Device This is the remote device SPA-Bus address which must be unique
Address within a SPA-Bus Client when a multi-drop connection is used.
DAPstudio™ uses the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device
Address to reference a device; for example, ABB-REF543:3

Restart The time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range is 0 to
Delay 100000 seconds with a default value of 30 seconds.

Time Sync. This is the frequency, entered in seconds, the DAPserver™ time
Period synchronizes the SPA-Bus device. The valid range is -1 to 360000
seconds and a default value of 1 (disable). This property has no effect
when the Time Sync. Period defined in the SPA-Bus Device Application
Summary Table is set to number greater than 0.

Polling Tab Refer to SPA-Bus Polling Table for detailed information on the SPA-Bus
Client polling table.

Query This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait for the SPA-Bus device to
Timeout respond to a query. The valid range is 0 to 65535 milliseconds with a
default setting of 100.

Fault Index This property specifies the Event Code for extracting fault records and
Data Event storing in the Historical database. Multiple fault records are referenced
Code using a “,” between the event codes; for example, E128, E129. Leaving
this property to empty indicates there are no fault records to retrieve.

Clear Event When enabled, the DAPserver™ will send the SPA-Bus device a clear
Buffer event command after successfully reading the events.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 205

Select This is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and operate
Timeout command sent by a Server application to this Client application. The
valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 30 seconds.

Polling Rate This is the minimum time, in milliseconds, between two Polling Event
commands. The valid range is 100 to 10000000 with a default setting of
1000 (1 second).

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communica- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

tion Fail communication with the SPA-Bus device fails. The total communication
attempts performed is one greater then this value, which equates to the
initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of automatic retries is 1
(retries disabled) to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

SPA-Bus Polling Table

Property Custom polling requirements can be programmed for each SPA-Bus
Window device, as shown in Figure 3-90.

Figure 3-90: SPA-Bus Client Polling Table

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 206

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Data Type The following data types are supported:

• Input data (SPA-Bus data category I)
• Output data (SPA-Bus data category O)
• Setting values (SPA-Bus data category S)
• Variables (SPA-Bus data category V)

The Data Type, Start Channel No, Total Channel No, Start Data Item,
and Total Data Item collectively define the SPA-Bus data. Consider the
following settings:
• Data Item = Input Data
• Start Channel No = 1
• Total Channel No = 3
• Start Data Item = 5
• Total Data Item = 2

The SPA-Bus Client will poll (in a single poll) the SPA-Bus device using
the codes: 1I5, 2I5, 3I5, 1I6, 2I6, and 3I6.

Start This is the first channel this polling record will be applied to. The Start
Channel No Channel No operates in conjunction with the Total Channel No to
specify a range of channels. The valid range is 0 to 1000 with a default
setting of 0.

Total This is the number of channels, starting with the channel specified in
Channel Start Channel No, this polling record is applied to. The valid range is 0
Numbers to 100 with a default setting of 0.

Start Data This is the first data item this polling record will be applied to. The Start
Item Data Item operates in conjunction with the Total Data Item to specify a
range of data items. The valid range is 0 to 32767 with a default setting
of 1.

Total Data This is the number of data items, starting with the data item specified in
Items Start Data Item, this polling record is applied to. The valid range is 1 to
32767 with a default setting of 1.

Poll Interval This property specifies the SPA-Bus device polling interval, for the
specified data type, in milliseconds. The valid range is 100 to
31536000000 milliseconds (1 year) with a default setting of 100.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 207

Analog Input I/O Parameters
Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-91,
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from a SPA-
Bus device.

Figure 3-91: SPA-Bus Client Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SPA-Bus Client Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input requested from the SPA-Bus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Channel No This is the SPA-Bus channel number used by the SPA-Bus Client to
retrieve the analog input value. The SPA-Bus Client uses the Channel
No. and Code to request analog input values; for example 120I1. The
valid range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 0.
If this analog input is reported by Event, the SPA-Bus Client will also
use the Channel No and an Event Code to identify the analog input, for
example 120Q1.

Code The Code, used in conjunction with the Channel No, is used by the
SPA-Bus Client to specify the analog input. The Code normally consists
of two parts; the first identifies the type, the second identifies the
position in that type. For example, I1, specifies the first input value.

Event Code The Event Code, used in conjunction with the Channel No, is used by
the SPA-Bus Client to specify an analog input event. The Code
normally consists of two parts; the first identifies the type, the second
identifies the position in that type.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-92, is
Window used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from a SPA-Bus

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 208

 device.

Figure 3-92: SPA-Bus Client Digital Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SPA-Bus Client Digital Input I/O Parameters
table for each digital input requested from the SPA-Bus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Channel No This is the SPA-Bus channel number used by the SPA-Bus Client to
retrieve the digital input state. The SPA-Bus Client uses the Channel No
and Code to request analog input values; for example 120V1. The valid
range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 0.
If this digital input is reported by Event, the SPA-Bus Client will also use
the Channel No and an Event Code to identify the analog input; for
example, 120E0.

Code The Code, used in conjunction with the Channel No, is used by the
SPA-Bus Client to specify the digital input. The Code normally consists
of two parts; the first identifies the type, the second identifies the
position in that type. For example, I1, specifies the first input value.

Open Event This property specifies the event code that indicates an open event has
Code been detected and qualified. No open status is expected from the
remote device when this property is empty.

Close Event This property specifies the event code that indicates a close event has
Code been detected and qualified. No close status is expected from the
remote device when this property is empty.

Travel Event This property is only for a double point digital input and specifies the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 209

Code event code for reporting the travel condition (both contacts open) has
been detected and qualified. There is no effect for single point digital
inputs.

Invalid Event This property is only for a double point digital input and specifies the
Code event code for reporting the invalid condition (both contacts closed) has
been detected and qualified. There is no effect for single point digital
inputs.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-93,
Window is used to specify the counter inputs retrieved from a SPA-Bus device.

Figure 3-93: SPA-Bus Client Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SPA-Bus Client Counter I/O Parameters
table for each counter requested from the SPA-Bus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Channel No This is the SPA-Bus channel number used by the SPA-Bus Client to
retrieve the counter value. The SPA-Bus Client uses the Channel No.
and Code to request counters; for example 120I1. The valid range is 0
to 255 with a default setting of 0.

Code The Code, used in conjunction with the Channel No, is used by the
SPA-Bus Client to specify a counter. The Code normally consists of two
parts; the first identifies the type, the second identifies the position in
that type. For example, V1, specifies the first variable.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-94,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in a SPA-Bus device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 210

 Figure 3-94: SPA-Bus Client Analog Output I/O Parameters
There is one record in the SPA-Bus Client Analog Output I/O
Parameters table for each analog output set in the SPA-Bus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Channel No This is the SPA-Bus channel number used by the SPA-Bus Client to set
the analog output. The SPA-Bus Client uses the Channel No and Code
to set analog outputs; for example 120S1. The valid range is 0 to 255
with a default setting of 0.

Code The Code, used in conjunction with the Channel No., is used by the
SPA-Bus Client to specify the analog output. The Code normally
consists of two parts; the first identifies the type, the second identifies
the position in that type. For example, S1, specifies the first setting.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-95,
Window is used to operate the digital outputs in a SPA-Bus device.

Figure 3-95: SPA-Bus Client Digital Output I/O Parameters

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 211

 There is one record in the SPA-Bus Client Digital Output I/O
Parameters table for each digital output operated in the SPA-Bus
device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Channel No This is the SPA-Bus channel number used by the SPA-Bus Client to
operate the digital output. The SPA-Bus Client uses the Channel No
and Code to operate digital outputs; for example, 120V1. The valid
range is 0 to 255 with a default setting of 0.

Code The Code, used in conjunction with the Channel No, is used by the
SPA-Bus Client to send a direct operation to the digital output. If the
open and close operation codes are different, use a "," to separate the
open and close codes. A “V1” Code is used when the direct open and
close output is the same. A “V1, V2” Code is used when the open
output is operated using V1 while the close output is operated using V2.
This property has no effect on a Select Before Operate output.

Select Open This property specifies the Code used by the SPA-Bus Client for the
Code select open operation. The SPA-Bus Client will use the Select Open
Event property to determine if the select open operation was
successful. This property has no effect on a Direct Operate output

Select Close This property specifies the Code used by the SPA-Bus Client for the
Code select close operation. The SPA-Bus Client will use the Select Close
Event property to determine if the select close operation was
successful. This property has no effect on a Direct Operate output

Execute This property specifies the code used to operate the selected output
Code and is not applicable for Direct Operate outputs.

Cancel Code This property specifies the code used to cancel a previous select
operation and is not applicable for a Direct Operate output

Select Open This property specifies the event code that indicates the result of the
Event Select Open operation. If the success and failure event codes are
different, use a “,” to separate the success and failure codes. An “E126,
E127” instructs the SPA-Bus Client that the receipt of an E126 event
indicates the select open operation was successful, while the receipt of
an E127 event indicates the select open operation failed.

Select Close This property specifies the event code that indicates the result of the
Event Select Close operation. If the success and failure event codes are
different, use a “,” to separate the success and failure codes. An “E126,

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 212

 E127” instructs the SPA-Bus Client that the receipt of an E126 event
indicates the select close operation was successful, while the receipt of
an E127 event indicates the select close operation failed.

Control The digital output can be operated as a potential or Pulse output. A

Code Pulse output may operate the output multiple times.

Output This is the number of times the output is operated when the Control
Counts Code is set to Pulse. The valid range is 1 to 100 with a default of 1
(single operation).

On Time This is the duration, in milliseconds; the output is on. This property is
only applicable to Pulse controls. The valid range is 1 to 10000
milliseconds with a default value of 100 milliseconds.

Off Time This is the duration, in milliseconds; the output is off. This property is
only applicable to Pulse controls. The valid range is 1 to 10000
milliseconds with a default value of 100 milliseconds.

Event Point I/O Parameters

Property The Event Point I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-96, is
Window used to specify the event points retrieved from a SPA-Bus device.

Figure 3-96: SPA-Bus Client Event I/O Parameter

There is one record in the SPA-Bus Client Event Point I/O Parameters
table for each event point requested from the SPA-Bus device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Channel No This is the SPA-Bus channel number used by the SPA-Bus Client to
retrieve the event. The SPA-Bus Client uses the Channel No., Close
Event Code and Open Event Code to read the status of an event point.

Open Event This property specifies the event code that indicates an open condition
Code has been detected and qualified. No open status is expected from the
remote device when this property is empty.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 213

Close Event This property specifies the event code that indicates a close condition
Code has been detected and qualified. No close status is expected from the
remote device when this property is empty.

Digital Input This property specifies the digital input associated with this event.
Bind with
this Event

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 214

Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories (SEL)
Client The SEL Client retrieves information and sends commands to SEL
protection relays. The SEL Client is limited to point-to-point
communications a single SEL protection relay on a communication
channel.
The SEL Client supports multiple communication channels to a
single device however unsolicited fast SER messaging must be
disabled in the remote device.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the SEL Client
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
SEL Client Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-97.

Figure 3-97: SEL Client Protocol Parameters

Message This property is the timeout, in milliseconds, for SEL communications.

Timeout Message Timeout is the maximum amount of time the DAPserver™ will
wait for a response from the SEL relay before declaring a
communication failure. This time must long enough to accommodate
the transmission of the request, processing by the relay, and the
transmission of the response. The valid range is 1000 to 1000000
milliseconds, with a default time of 4000 (4 seconds).

Max ASCII This property specifies the maximum timeout period, in minutes, for
Timeout pending ASCII responses.

V-Port This property will enable concurrent VPort operation on the SEL Client
Binding communication channel. By default, VPort Binding is disabled.

V-Port This is the maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™

Scantime will wait for a response to a VPort message. This property has no effect
when the VPort Binding property is disabled. The valid range is 10 to

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 215

 10000000 milliseconds with a default of 10 milliseconds.

SEL Device
Property The SEL Device properties are accessed by selecting the SEL device in
Window the System Management window. The SEL Client Device property
window is shown in Figure 3-98 .

Figure 3-98: SEL Client Device

Device The SEL Client communication is always point-to-point; therefore the

Address Device Address is not required for communications. DAPstudio™ uses
the Manufacturer, Device Type, and Device Address to reference a
device, for example:
SEL-SEL-351S:3
The format is shown in Figure 3-99.

- :

Device Address

Device Type

Manufacturer
Figure 3-99: SEL Device Reference Format

SEL Model This is the SEL relay model and is selected from the pull down list.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 216

Unsolicited This property applies to SEL relay, which support Unsolicited
SER Sequential Events Recorder messages. Enabling this feature will
instruct the SEL Client to accept and process SER data. The SEL Client
discards SER data when this feature is disabled. Enabling this feature
for an SEL relay, which does not support Unsolicited Sequential Events
Recorder messages, is harmless.
The DAPserver™ currently supports Unsolicited Sequential Events
Recorder messaging for the following relay models:
• SEL-351, 351A, 351S
• SEL-387, 387A, 387E

Fast Meter This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™
Scan Interval polls the SEL relay for Fast Meter data. The valid range is 100 to
3600000, with a default of 1000. Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the Fast Meter data update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less
then or equal to the desired maximum Fast Meter data update time.

Demand This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™

Meter Scan polls the SEL relay for Demand Fast Meter data. The valid range is 100
Interval to 3600000, with a default of 5000. Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the Demand Fast Meter data update time and increases the
available communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a
value less then or equal to the desired maximum Demand Fast Meter
data update time.

Peak Meter This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds, the DAPserver™
Scan Interval polls the SEL relay for Peak Demand Fast Meter data. The valid range
is 100 to 3600000, with a default of 10000. Decreasing the polling
frequency decreases the Peak Demand Fast Meter data update time
and increases the available communication bandwidth. This property
should be set to a value less then or equal to the desired maximum
Peak Demand Fast Meter data update time.

Maximum The maximum number of SER records the SEL relay will return in a
SER records response. The valid range is 1 to 32, with a default value of 32 records.
The DAPserver™ instructs the SEL relay to limit the SER message
response to this value.

ASCII Polling This property specifies the ASCII polling commands requirements
Table configured for each SEL device. For more information, please refer to
the corresponding section on the next page.

Point This property allows you to customize the point reference parameters
Reference for each SEL device. For more information, please refer to the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 217

Table corresponding section on the next page.

Level 1 The property specifies the level 1 access password for the SEL device.
Password

Level 2 The property specifies the level 2 access password for the SEL device.
Password

Event File This property specifies the directory to where all the configured ASCII
Directory reports are saved on the DAPserver™.

Maximum This property specifies the maximum number of the report files that can
Event Log be saved to the above directory. This limit applies to each ASCII
Count command that is configured under the ASCII Polling Table, i.e., for each
command configured, only 50 report files are saved to the specified
directory.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communica- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

tion Fail communication with the SEL relay is failed. The total communication
attempts performed is one greater then this value, which equates to the
initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of automatic retries is 1
to 10000. The default setting is 3 retries.

SEL ASCII Polling Table

Property Custom polling requirements can be programmed for each SEL device,
Window as shown in Figure 3-100.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 218

 Figure 3-100: SEL Client Polling Table

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Command The ASCII command that is sent to the device. This parameter should
match the exact syntax of the SEL ASCII command to which it refers.

Polling Type The polling type of the specified ASCII command. The available options
are: Periodical, Even based and At Startup.

Parameter For a Periodical Polling Type, it specifies the length of the period in
milliseconds.

Access The access level assigned to this command.

Level

Point Reference Table

Property Custom point reference parameters can be programmed for each SEL
Window device, as shown in Figure 3-101.

Figure 3-101: SEL Client Point Reference Table

Property ID This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.

Point Type The point type for which the value is configured. Only Analog and
Digital Input point types are available.

Point Ref. No The point number that to which the value is assigned. This is the Point
Index/Row of the point under the I/O Parameter tab. The point should
be defined for the same point type configured above.

Row The row number of the value in the ASCII report.

Column The column number of the value in the ASCII report.

Command ID The Property ID assigned to the command associated with the value of

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 219

 this point in the ASCII Polling Table.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-102,
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from a SEL
relay using the SEL Fast Meter, Demand Fast Meter, and Peak
Demand Fast Meter commands.

Figure 3-102: SEL Client Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SEL Client Analog Input I/O Parameters table
for each analog input requested from the SEL device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point The Point Index property specifies the analog input measurement to be
Index/Row retrieved from the SEL relay. The following sections define the point
indices for the supported SEL relay models.

SEL-PG10 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-2PG10 command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-PG10, SEL-2PG10-
0, SEL-2PG10-7, and SEL-2PG10-8. The DAPserver™ also calculates
a set of values using the Fast Meter measurements. The retrieved and
calculated measurements are referenced using the point indices
defined in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9: SEL-PG10/2PG10 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Measurement Source
Index
0 Phase A current Fast

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 220

 Point Measurement Source
Index
1 Phase B current Meter
2 Phase C current
3 Phase A voltage
4 Phase B voltage
5 Phase C voltage
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-PG10 and SEL-2PG10 models.

SEL-121-10 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-121-10. The
DAPserver™ also calculates a set of values using the Fast Meter
measurements. The retrieved and calculated measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-10.
Table 3-10: SEL-121-10 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current Fast
3 Phase A voltage Meter
4 Phase B voltage
5 Phase C voltage
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-121-10.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 221

SEL-121B The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-121C command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-121B, SEL-121C,
SEL-121G SEL-121G, SEL-121H, SEL-121S, SEL-221B, SEL-221C, SEL-221G,
SEL-121H SEL-221H and SEL-221S models. The DAPserver™ also calculates a
SEL-121S set of values using the Fast Meter measurements. The retrieved and
SEL-221B calculated measurements are referenced using the point indices
SEL-221C defined in Table 3-11.
SEL-221G
SEL-221H
SEL-221S
Table 3-11: SEL-
121B/121C/121G/121H/121S/221B/221C/221G/221H/221S
Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current Fast
3 Phase A voltage Meter
4 Phase B voltage
5 Phase C voltage
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-121B, SEL-121C. SEL-121G, SEL-121H,
SEL-121S, SEL-221B, SEL-221C, SEL-221G, SEL-221H, and SEL-
221S models.

SEL-121F The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-221F command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-121F and SEL-221F
models. The DAPserver™ also calculates a set of values using the Fast
Meter measurements. The retrieved and calculated measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-12.
Table 3-12: SEL-121F/221F Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Residual current Fast
1 Phase A current Meter
2 Phase B current
3 Phase C current
4 Phase A voltage

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 222

 Point Index Measurement Source
5 Phase B voltage
6 Phase C voltage
7 Synch-check voltage
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-121F and SEL-221F models.

SEL-151 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-151C command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-151, SEL-151C,
SEL-251 SEL-251-0, SEL-251-1, SEL-251-2, SEL-251-3, SEL-251C-0, SEL-
SEL-251C 251C-1, SEL-251C-2, and SEL-251C-3. The DAPserver™ also
calculates a set of values using the Fast Meter measurements. The
retrieved and calculated measurements are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-13.
Table 3-13: SEL-151/151C/251/251C Analog Input Point
Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current Fast
3 Phase A voltage Meter
4 Phase B voltage
5 Phase C voltage
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-151, SEL-151C, SEL-251, and SEL-251C
models.

SEL-251CD The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-251D command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-251CD-0, SEL-
251CD-1, SEL-251CD-3, SEL-251D-0, SEL-251D-1 and SEL-251D-3.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 223

 The DAPserver™ also calculates a set of values using the Fast Meter
measurements. The retrieved and calculated measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-14.
Table 3-14: SEL-251CD/251D Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current Fast
3 Phase A to phase B voltage Meter
4 Phase B to phase C voltage
5 Phase C to phase A voltage
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-215CD and SEL-251D models.

SEL-267D The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-267D and SEL-
267D-3. The DAPserver™ also calculates a set of values using the Fast
Meter measurements. The retrieved and calculated measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-15.
Table 3-15: SEL-267D Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current Fast
3 Phase A to phase B voltage Meter
4 Phase B to phase C voltage
5 Phase C to phase A voltage
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-267D.

SEL-300G The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-300G. The retrieved
and calculated measurements are referenced using the point indices
defined in Table 3-16.
Table 3-16: SEL-300G Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current Fast
1 Phase B current Meter
2 Phase C current
3 Neutral current
4 Phase A voltage

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 224

 Point Index Measurement Source
5 Phase B voltage
6 Phase C voltage
7 Neutral voltage
8 Frequency
9 Station battery voltage
10 Demand phase A current
11 Demand phase B current
12 Demand phase C current
13 Demand neutral current
14 Demand ground current
15 Demand negative sequence current
16 Demand imported phase A active power
17 Demand imported phase B active power
18 Demand imported phase C active power
19 Demand imported 3-phase active power
Demand
20 Demand imported phase A reactive power
Fast
21 Demand imported phase B reactive power
Meter
22 Demand imported phase C reactive power
23 Demand imported 3-phase reactive power
24 Demand exported phase A active power
25 Demand exported phase B active power
26 Demand exported phase C active power
27 Demand exported 3-phase active power
28 Demand exported phase A reactive power
29 Demand exported phase B reactive power
30 Demand exported phase C reactive power
31 Demand exported 3-phase reactive power
32 Peak demand phase A current
33 Peak demand phase B current
34 Peak demand phase C current
35 Peak demand neutral current
36 Peak demand ground current
37 Peak demand negative sequence current
38 Peak demand imported phase A active power
39 Peak demand imported phase B active power
40 Peak demand imported phase C active power
41 Peak demand imported 3-phase active power Peak
42 Peak demand imported phase A reactive power Demand
43 Peak demand imported phase B reactive power Fast
44 Peak demand imported phase C reactive power Meter
45 Peak demand imported 3-phase reactive power
46 Peak demand exported phase A active power
47 Peak demand exported phase B active power
48 Peak demand exported phase C active power
49 Peak demand exported 3-phase active power
50 Peak demand exported phase A reactive power
51 Peak demand exported phase B reactive power
52 Peak demand exported phase C reactive power
53 Peak demand exported 3-phase reactive power
64 Phase A active power Calculated
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 225

 Point Index Measurement Source
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

SEL-311 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-311B command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-311A, SEL-311B,
SEL-311C SEL-311C and SEL-311L models. The retrieved and calculated
SEL-311L measurements are referenced using the point indices defined in Table
3-17.
Table 3-17: SEL-311A/311B/311C/311L Analog Input Point
Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current
3 Polarizing current
4 Phase A voltage
5 Phase B voltage
6 Phase C voltage
7 Synchronism voltage
8 Frequency
Fast
9 Station battery voltage
Meter
10 Channel X phase A current
11 Channel X phase B current
12 Channel X phase C current
13 Channel Y phase A current
14 Channel Y phase B current
15 Channel Y phase C current
16 Phase A current vector sum
17 Phase B current vector sum
18 Phase C current vector sum
19 Demand phase A current Demand
20 Demand phase B current Fast
21 Demand phase C current Meter
22 Demand neutral current
23 Demand ground current
24 Demand negative sequence current
25 Demand imported phase A active power
26 Demand imported phase B active power
27 Demand imported phase C active power
28 Demand imported 3-phase active power
29 Demand imported phase A reactive power
30 Demand imported phase B reactive power
31 Demand imported phase C reactive power
32 Demand imported 3-phase reactive power
33 Demand exported phase A active power
34 Demand exported phase B active power
35 Demand exported phase C active power
36 Demand exported 3-phase active power
37 Demand exported phase A reactive power

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 226

 Point Index Measurement Source
38 Demand exported phase B reactive power
39 Demand exported phase C reactive power
40 Demand exported 3-phase reactive power
41 Peak demand phase A current
42 Peak demand phase B current
43 Peak demand phase C current
44 Peak demand neutral current
45 Peak demand ground current
46 Peak demand negative sequence current
47 Peak demand imported phase A active power
48 Peak demand imported phase B active power
49 Peak demand imported phase C active power
50 Peak demand imported 3-phase active power Peak
51 Peak demand imported phase A reactive power Demand
52 Peak demand imported phase B reactive power Fast
53 Peak demand imported phase C reactive power Meter
54 Peak demand imported 3-phase reactive power
55 Peak demand exported phase A active power
56 Peak demand exported phase B active power
57 Peak demand exported phase C active power
58 Peak demand exported 3-phase active power
59 Peak demand exported phase A reactive power
60 Peak demand exported phase B reactive power
61 Peak demand exported phase C reactive power
62 Peak demand exported 3-phase reactive power
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

SEL-321 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve measurements from the SEL-321-1 and SEL-321-
2 models. The DAPserver™ also calculates a set of values using the
Fast Meter measurements. The retrieved and calculated measurements
are referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-18.
Table 3-18: SEL-321 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current Fast
3 Phase A voltage Meter
4 Phase B voltage
5 Phase C voltage
64 Phase A active power Calculated
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 227

 Point Index Measurement Source
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

The Demand Fast Meter Scan Interval and Peak Demand Fast
Meter Scan Interval (see 0SEL Device) must be disabled (set
to 0) for the SEL-321-1 and SEL-321-2 models.

SEL-351 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
SEL-351A Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
SEL-351R retrieve measurements from the SEL-351, 351A, 351R, and 351S
SEL-351S models. The DAPserver™ also calculates a set of values using the Fast
Meter measurements. The retrieved and calculated measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-19.
Table 3-19: SEL-351/351A/351R/351S Analog Input Point
Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current
3 Neutral current
4 Phase A voltage Fast
5 Phase B voltage Meter
6 Phase C voltage
7 Synchronism check voltage
8 Frequency
9 Station battery voltage
10 Demand phase A current
11 Demand phase B current
12 Demand phase C current
13 Demand neutral current
14 Demand ground current
15 Demand negative sequence current
16 Demand imported phase A active power
17 Demand imported phase B active power
18 Demand imported phase C active power
19 Demand imported 3-phase active power
Demand
20 Demand imported phase A reactive power
Fast
21 Demand imported phase B reactive power
Meter
22 Demand imported phase C reactive power
23 Demand imported 3-phase reactive power
24 Demand exported phase A active power
25 Demand exported phase B active power
26 Demand exported phase C active power
27 Demand exported 3-phase active power
28 Demand exported phase A reactive power
29 Demand exported phase B reactive power
30 Demand exported phase C reactive power
31 Demand exported 3-phase reactive power
32 Peak demand phase A current Peak

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 228

 Point Index Measurement Source
33 Peak demand phase B current Demand
34 Peak demand phase C current Fast
35 Peak demand neutral current Meter
36 Peak demand ground current
37 Peak demand negative sequence current
38 Peak demand imported phase A active power
39 Peak demand imported phase B active power
40 Peak demand imported phase C active power
41 Peak demand imported 3-phase active power
42 Peak demand imported phase A reactive power
43 Peak demand imported phase B reactive power
44 Peak demand imported phase C reactive power
45 Peak demand imported 3-phase reactive power
46 Peak demand exported phase A active power
47 Peak demand exported phase B active power
48 Peak demand exported phase C active power
49 Peak demand exported 3-phase active power
50 Peak demand exported phase A reactive power
51 Peak demand exported phase B reactive power
52 Peak demand exported phase C reactive power
53 Peak demand exported 3-phase reactive power
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

SEL-387 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-387-0, SEL-387-5, and SEL-387-
6. The measurements are referenced using the point indices defined in
Table 3-20.
Table 3-20: SEL-387 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current, winding 1
1 Phase B current, winding 1
2 Phase C current, winding 1
3 Phase A current, winding 2
4 Phase B current, winding 2
5 Phase C current, winding 2 Fast
6 Phase A current, winding 3 Meter
7 Phase B current, winding 3
8 Phase C current, winding 3
9 Phase A current, winding 4
10 Phase B current, winding 4
11 Phase C current, winding 4
12 Demand phase A current, winding 1 Demand
13 Demand phase B current, winding 1 Fast

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 229

 Point Index Measurement Source
14 Demand phase C current, winding 1 Meter
15 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 1
16 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 1
17 Demand phase A current, winding 2
18 Demand phase B current, winding 2
19 Demand phase C current, winding 2
20 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 2
21 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
22 Demand phase A current, winding 3
23 Demand phase B current, winding 3
24 Demand phase C current, winding 3
25 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 3
26 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 3
27 Demand phase A current, winding 4
28 Demand phase B current, winding 4
29 Demand phase C current, winding 4
30 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 4
31 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 4
32 Peak demand phase A current, winding 1
33 Peak demand phase B current, winding 1
34 Peak demand phase C current, winding 1
35 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 1
36 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 1
37 Peak demand phase A current, winding 2
38 Peak demand phase B current, winding 2
39 Peak demand phase C current, winding 2
40 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 2
41 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from Peak
winding 2 Demand
42 Peak demand phase A current, winding 3 Fast
43 Peak demand phase B current, winding 3 Meter
44 Peak demand phase C current, winding 3
45 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 3
46 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 3
47 Peak demand phase A current, winding 4
48 Peak demand phase B current, winding 4
49 Peak demand phase C current, winding 4
50 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 4
51 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 4

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 230

SEL-387A The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-387A. The measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-21.
Table 3-21: SEL-387A Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current, winding 1
1 Phase B current, winding 1
2 Phase C current, winding 1
3 Phase A current, winding 2
4 Phase B current, winding 2
5 Phase C current, winding 2
Fast
6 Phase A current, winding 3
Meter
7 Phase B current, winding 3
8 Phase C current, winding 3
9 Neutral current, winding 1
10 Neutral current, winding 2
11 Neutral current, winding 3
12 Station battery
13 Demand phase A current, winding 1
14 Demand phase B current, winding 1
15 Demand phase C current, winding 1
16 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 1
17 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 1
18 Demand phase A current, winding 2
19 Demand phase B current, winding 2
20 Demand phase C current, winding 2 Demand
21 Demand negative sequence current derived from Fast
winding 2 Meter
22 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
23 Demand phase A current, winding 3
24 Demand phase B current, winding 3
25 Demand phase C current, winding 3
26 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 3
27 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 3
28 Peak demand phase A current, winding 1 Peak
29 Peak demand phase B current, winding 1 Demand
30 Peak demand phase C current, winding 1 Fast
31 Peak demand negative sequence current derived Meter
from winding 1
32 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 1
33 Peak demand phase A current, winding 2
34 Peak demand phase B current, winding 2
35 Peak demand phase C current, winding 2
36 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 2

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 231

 Point Index Measurement Source
37 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
38 Peak demand phase A current, winding 3
39 Peak demand phase B current, winding 3
40 Peak demand phase C current, winding 3
41 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 3
42 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 3

SEL-387E The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-387E. The measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-22.
Table 3-22: SEL-387E Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current, winding 1
1 Phase B current, winding 1
2 Phase C current, winding 1
3 Phase A current, winding 2
4 Phase B current, winding 2
5 Phase C current, winding 2
Fast
6 Phase A current, winding 3
Meter
7 Phase B current, winding 3
8 Phase C current, winding 3
9 Phase A voltage
10 Phase B voltage
11 Phase C voltage
12 Station battery
13 Demand phase A current, winding 1
14 Demand phase B current, winding 1
15 Demand phase C current, winding 1
16 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 1
17 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 1
18 Demand phase A current, winding 2
19 Demand phase B current, winding 2
20 Demand phase C current, winding 2 Demand
21 Demand negative sequence current derived from Fast
winding 2 Meter
22 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
23 Demand phase A current, winding 3
24 Demand phase B current, winding 3
25 Demand phase C current, winding 3
26 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 3
27 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 3
28 Peak demand phase A current, winding 1 Peak
29 Peak demand phase B current, winding 1 Demand

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 232

 Point Index Measurement Source
30 Peak demand phase C current, winding 1 Fast
31 Peak demand negative sequence current derived Meter
from winding 1
32 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 1
33 Peak demand phase A current, winding 2
34 Peak demand phase B current, winding 2
35 Peak demand phase C current, winding 2
36 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 2
37 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
38 Peak demand phase A current, winding 3
39 Peak demand phase B current, winding 3
40 Peak demand phase C current, winding 3
41 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 3
42 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 3

SEL-421 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-421-0 and SEL-421-1. The
measurements are referenced using the point indices defined in Table
3-23.
Table 3-23: SEL-421 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current, winding 1
1 Phase B current, winding 1
2 Phase C current, winding 1
3 Phase A current, winding 2
4 Phase B current, winding 2
5 Phase C current, winding 2
6 Phase A voltage, winding 1
7 Phase B voltage, winding 1
Fast
8 Phase C voltage, winding 1
Meter
9 Phase A voltage, winding 2
10 Phase B voltage, winding 2
11 Phase C voltage, winding 2
12 Frequency
13 Automation math variable 1
14 Automation math variable 2
15 Automation math variable 3
16 Automation math variable 4
17 Demand phase A current, winding 1 Demand
18 Demand phase B current, winding 1 Fast
19 Demand phase C current, winding 1 Mete
20 Demand zero sequence current
21 Demand negative sequence current
22 Demand imported phase A active power
23 Demand imported phase B active power
24 Demand imported phase C active power

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 233

 Point Index Measurement Source
25 Demand imported 3-phase active power
26 Peak demand phase A current, winding 1
27 Peak demand phase B current, winding 1
28 Peak demand phase C current, winding 1
Peak
29 Peak demand zero sequence current
Demand
30 Peak demand negative sequence current
Fast
31 Peak demand imported phase A active power Meter
32 Peak demand imported phase B active power
33 Peak demand imported phase C active power
34 Peak demand imported 3-phase active power
64 Phase A active power
65 Phase B active power
66 Phase C active power
67 Three phase active power
Calculated
68 Phase A reactive power
69 Phase B reactive power
70 Phase C reactive power
71 Three phase reactive power

SEL-501 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-501-0 and SEL-501-1. The
measurements are referenced using the point indices defined in Table
3-24.
Table 3-24: SEL-501 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current, winding 1
1 Phase B current, winding 1
2 Phase C current, winding 1 Fast
3 Phase A current, winding 2 Meter
4 Phase B current, winding 2
5 Phase C current, winding 2
6 Demand phase A current, winding 1
7 Demand phase B current, winding 1
8 Demand phase C current, winding 1
9 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 1
10 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
Demand
winding 1
Fast
11 Demand phase A current, winding 2
Meter
12 Demand phase B current, winding 2
13 Demand phase C current, winding 2
14 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 2
15 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
16 Peak demand phase A current, winding 1 Peak
17 Peak demand phase B current, winding 1 Demand
18 Peak demand phase C current, winding 1 Fast
19 Peak demand negative sequence current derived Meter
from winding 1
20 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 234

 Point Index Measurement Source
winding 1
21 Peak demand phase A current, winding 2
22 Peak demand phase B current, winding 2
23 Peak demand phase C current, winding 2
24 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 2
25 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2

SEL-551 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
SEL-551C Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-551 and SEL-551C. The
measurements are referenced using the point indices defined in Table
3-25.
Table 3-25: SEL-551 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current Fast
2 Phase C current Meter
3 Neutral current
4 Demand phase A current
5 Demand phase B current
Demand
6 Demand phase C current
Fast
7 Demand neutral current
Meter
8 Demand ground current
9 Demand negative sequence current
10 Peak demand phase A current
Peak
11 Peak demand phase B current
Demand
12 Peak demand phase C current
Fast
13 Peak demand neutral current Meter
14 Peak demand negative sequence current

SEL-587 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter,
Fast Demand Meter and Fast Peak Demand Meter commands to
retrieve measurements from the SEL-587. The measurements are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-26.
Table 3-26: SEL-587 Analog Input Point Indices
Point Index Measurement Source
0 Phase A current, winding 1
1 Phase B current, winding 1
2 Phase C current, winding 1 Fast
3 Phase A current, winding 2 Meter
4 Phase B current, winding 2
5 Phase C current, winding 2
6 Demand phase A current, winding 1 Demand
7 Demand phase B current, winding 1 Fast
8 Demand phase C current, winding 1 Meter
9 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 1
10 Demand residual (ground) current derived from

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 235

 Point Index Measurement Source
winding 1
11 Demand phase A current, winding 2
12 Demand phase B current, winding 2
13 Demand phase C current, winding 2
14 Demand negative sequence current derived from
winding 2
15 Demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2
16 Peak demand phase A current, winding 1
17 Peak demand phase B current, winding 1
18 Peak demand phase C current, winding 1
19 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 1
20 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from Peak
winding 1 Demand
21 Peak demand phase A current, winding 2 Fast
22 Peak demand phase B current, winding 2 Meter
23 Peak demand phase C current, winding 2
24 Peak demand negative sequence current derived
from winding 2
25 Peak demand residual (ground) current derived from
winding 2

Digital Input I/O Parameters

SER Bit The Unsolicited Sequential Events Recorder is programmable and you
Indices must query the relay to determine the point assignment. The SNS
command reports the SER configuration using the format shown in
Figure 3-103.

Figure 3-103: SEL SNS

Each ASCII name is a SER trigger with index 00 being the first, “TRIP”.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 236

 The second, index 01, is “51P1T”.

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-104,
Window is used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from a SEL relay
using the SEL Fast Meter command.

Figure 3-104: SEL Client Digital Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SEL Client Digital Input I/O Parameters table
for each digital input requested from the SEL device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point The Point Index property specifies the digital input indication to be
Index/Row retrieved from the SEL relay. The digital input point indices are derived
from the relay word bits as shown in Equation 3-2.
Point Index = (Row * 8) + Bit
Equation 3-2: SEL Digital Input Point Index
An abbreviated listing of the SEL-351S relay word bits, for the physical
inputs and outputs, is shown in Table 3-27.

Table 3-27: Sample SEL-351S Relay Word Bits

Relay Word Bit
Row
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
45 OUT20 OUT20 OUT20 OUT20 OUT20 OUT20 OUT20 OUT20

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 237

 Relay Word Bit
Row
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
46 OUT20 OUT21 OUT21 OUT21
9 0 1 2
47 IN208 IN207 IN206 IN205 IN204 IN203 IN202 IN201

Using Equation 3- the point index for input 204 is:

IN204 Point Index = (47 * 8) + 3 = 379

Equation 3-3: IN204 Point Index
Additional digital inputs are available from the Status Byte returned in
the response to the Fast Meter command. Table 3-28 is a summary of
the point indices applied for the Status Byte information.

Table 3-28: Status Byte Point Indices

Status Byte Bit Point Index
0 10000
1 10001
2 10002
3 10003
4 10004
5 10005
6 10006
7 10007

Some SEL devices may not return a status byte, please check
the SEL documentation.

SER This property is used to associate an event point with the digital input
Associate indication. The association is created by entering the Event Index value
Index from the SNS command (see Figure 3-103).

SEL-300G The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-300G. The Status
Indications are referenced using the point indices defined in
Table 3-29.

Table 3-29: SEL-300G Status Byte

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 238

 Point Index Status Indication
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-311A The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-311B command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-311A, SEL-311B,
SEL-311C SEL-311C and SEL-SEL-311L models. The Status Indications are
SEL-311L referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-30.

Table 3-30: SEL-311 Status Byte

Point Index Status Indication
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-321 The D DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Meter command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-321-1 an
SEL-321-2 models. The Status Indications are referenced using the
point indices defined in Table 3-31.

Table 3-31: SEL-321 Status Byte

Point Index Status Indication
10000 STPWR (Power up)
10001 STEVE (Event trigger)
10002 STWARN (Self-test warning)
10003 STFAIL (Self-test failure)
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-351 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-351A command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-351, SEL-351A,
SEL-351R SEL-351R and SEL-SEL-351S. The Status Indications are referenced
SEL-351S using the point indices defined in Table 3-32.

Table 3-32: SEL-351 Status Byte

Point Index Status Indication
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-387 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-387A command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-387, SEL-387A, and
SEL-387E SEL-387E models. The Status Indications are referenced using the
point indices defined in Table 3-33.

Table 3-33: SEL-387 Status Byte

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 239

 Point Index Status Indication
10002 STWARN (Self-test warning)
10003 STFAIL (Self-test failure)
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-501 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-501-0 and SEL-501-
1. The Status Indications are referenced using the point indices defined
in Table 3-34.

Table 3-34: SEL-501 Status Byte

Point Index Status Indication
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-551 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-551C command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-551 and SEL-551C.
The Status Indications are referenced using the point indices defined in
Table 3-35.

Table 3-35: SEL-551 Status Byte

Point Index Status Indication
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-587 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-587. The Status
Indications are referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-36.

Table 3-36: SEL-587 Status Byte

Point Index Status Indication
10000 STPWR (Power up)
10001 STEVE (Event trigger)
10002 STWARN (Self-test warning)
10003 STFAIL (Self-test failure)
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

SEL-2515 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast Meter
SEL-2516 command to retrieve the Status Byte from the SEL-2515 and SEL-2516.
The Status Indications are referenced using the point indices defined in
Table 3-37.

Table 3-37: SEL-2515 Status Byte

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 240

 Point Index Status Indication
10000 STPWR (Power up)
10001 STEVE (Event trigger)
10002 STWARN (Self-test warning)
10003 STFAIL (Self-test failure)
10004 STSET (Group or setting change)

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure
Window 3-105, is used to operate the digital outputs in a SEL relay using the
SEL Fast Operate Remote Bit Control and Fast Operate Breaker
Control command.

Figure 3-105: SEL Client Digital Output I/O Parameters

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point Index The Point Index property specifies the digital output to be operated in
the SEL relay. The following sections define the point indices for the
supported SEL relay models.

Control Type Fast Breaker Operate Controls are always “Trip/Close” and Fast
Remote Bit Operate Controls can be “Pulse” or “Latch”. The following
sections define the control types for the supported SEL relay outputs.

Count This property is only applicable to the “Pulse” Control Type and
specifies the repeat operations of the output. The output is operated 3
times when this setting is 2, the initial operation plus 2 repeat
operations. The valid repeat counts are 0 to 1000 operations with a
default setting of 0 (initial operation only).

On Time This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is on. This property is
only applicable to the “Pulse” Control Type. The valid range is 0 to
60000 milliseconds with default value of 500 milliseconds.

Off Time This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is off. This property is
only applicable to the “Pulse” Control Type. The valid range is 0 to
60000 milliseconds with default value of 500 milliseconds.

SEL-251 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 241

 Operate Breaker Control to send commands to the SEL-251-1, SEL-
251-3, SEL-251C-1, SEL-251C-3, SEL-251D-1, SEL-251D-3, SEL-
251CD-1, and SEL-251CD-3. The outputs are referenced using the
point indices defined in Table 3-38.
Table 3-38: SEL-251 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker Trip/Close

SEL-300G The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control
command to send commands to the SEL-300G. The outputs are
referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-39.
Table 3-39: SEL-300G Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Circuit breaker Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-311 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 242

SEL-311B Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control
SEL-311C command to send commands to the SEL-311A, SEL-311B, SEL-311C
SEL-311L and SEL-311L models. The outputs are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-40.
Table 3-40: SEL-311A/311B/311C/311L Digital Output Point
Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Circuit breaker Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-321 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-321-1. The outputs are referenced using the
point indices defined in Table 3-41.
Table 3-41: SEL-321-1 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 243

 Point Index Output Control
Type
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-351 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-351. The outputs are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-42.
Table 3-42: SEL-351 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 244

 Point Index Output Control
Type
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

The SEL-351-0, SEL-351-1, SEL-351-2, SEL-351-3, and SEL-

351-4 are limited to remote bits 1 to 8. The SEL-351-5, SEL-
351-6, and SEL-351-7 support remote bits 1 to 16.

SEL-351A The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
SEL-351R Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
SEL-351S commands to the SEL-351A, SEL-351R, and SEL-351S. The outputs
are referenced using the point indices defined in Table 3-43.
Table 3-43: SEL-351A/351R/351S Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 245

 Point Index Output Control
Type
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-387 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-387. The outputs are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-44.
Table 3-44: SEL 387 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker 1 Trip/Close
1 Breaker 2 Trip/Close
2 Breaker 3 Trip/Close
3 Breaker 4 Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 246

 Point Index Output Control
Type
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-387A The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-387A. The outputs are referenced using the
point indices defined in Table 3-45.
Table 3-45: SEL-387A Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker 1 Trip/Close
1 Breaker 2 Trip/Close
2 Breaker 3 Trip/Close
3 Breaker 4 Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 247

 Point Index Output Control
Type
Latch

SEL-387E The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-387E. The outputs are referenced using the
point indices defined in Table 3-46.
Table 3-46: SEL-387E Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker 1 Trip/Close
1 Breaker 2 Trip/Close
2 Breaker 3 Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-421 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-421. The outputs are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-47.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 248

 Table 3-47: SEL-421 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker 1 Trip/Close
1 Breaker 2 Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or latch
16 Remote bit 17 Pulse or latch
17 Remote bit 18 Pulse or latch
18 Remote bit 19 Pulse or latch
19 Remote bit 20 Pulse or latch
20 Remote bit 21 Pulse or latch
21 Remote bit 22 Pulse or latch
22 Remote bit 23 Pulse or latch
23 Remote bit 24 Pulse or latch
24 Remote bit 25 Pulse or latch
25 Remote bit 26 Pulse or latch
26 Remote bit 27 Pulse or latch
27 Remote bit 28 Pulse or latch
28 Remote bit 29 Pulse or latch
29 Remote bit 30 Pulse or latch
30 Remote bit 31 Pulse or latch
31 Remote bit 31 Pulse or latch

SEL-501 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-501. The outputs are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-48.
Table 3-48: SEL-501 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker X Trip/Close
1 Breaker Y Trip/Close
0 Remote bit X Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit Y Pulse or
Latch

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 249

 The SEL-501-0 and SEL-501-1 do not support to remote bits.
The SEL-501-2 supports remote bits X and Y

SEL-551 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
SEL-551C Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-551 and SEL-551C. The outputs are referenced
using the point indices defined in Table 3-49.
Table 3-49: SEL-551/551C Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-587 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
Operate Breaker Control and Fast Operate Remote Bit Control to send
commands to the SEL-587. The outputs are referenced using the point
indices defined in Table 3-50.
Table 3-50: SEL-587 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker 1 Trip/Close
1 Breaker 2 Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch

SEL-2515 The DAPserver™ SEL Client implementation uses the SEL Fast
SEL-2516 Operate Control to send commands to the SEL-2515 and SEL-2516.
The outputs are referenced using the point indices defined in Table
3-51.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 250

 Table 3-51: SEL-2515/2516 Digital Output Point Indices
Point Index Output Control
Type
0 Breaker 1 Trip/Close
1 Breaker 2 Trip/Close
2 Breaker 3 Trip/Close
3 Breaker 4 Trip/Close
0 Remote bit 1 Pulse or
Latch
1 Remote bit 2 Pulse or
Latch
2 Remote bit 3 Pulse or
Latch
3 Remote bit 4 Pulse or
Latch
4 Remote bit 5 Pulse or
Latch
5 Remote bit 6 Pulse or
Latch
6 Remote bit 7 Pulse or
Latch
7 Remote bit 8 Pulse or
Latch
8 Remote bit 9 Pulse or
Latch
9 Remote bit 10 Pulse or
Latch
10 Remote bit 11 Pulse or
Latch
11 Remote bit 12 Pulse or
Latch
12 Remote bit 13 Pulse or
Latch
13 Remote bit 14 Pulse or
Latch
14 Remote bit 15 Pulse or
Latch
15 Remote bit 16 Pulse or
Latch

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 251

SC1801
Client The SC1801 Client retrieves information and sends commands to
SC1801 devices. The SC1801 Client can address multiple SC1801
devices on a single communication channel.
SC1801 devices are defined using a slot configuration approach, with
each device supporting a fixed number of slots. A configuration slot may
be fitted with an I/O card. The configuration of the SC1801 Client
references the configuration slot number and point location on the
board.

Protocol Parameters
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the SC1801 Client
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
SC1801 Client Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-106.

Figure 3-106: SC1801 Client Protocol Parameters

Base Year This property specifies the year used when calculating the relative time
for time synchronizing the SC1801 device and parsing SOEs. The valid
range is 1900 to 2038 with a default year of 1970.

Counter This property specifies the period, in seconds; the SC1801 Client will
Scan Interval freeze and read the accumulators in the SC1801 device. The valid
range is 0 (counter freeze and read disabled) to 10000000 seconds with
a default value of 1. The freeze operation is further defined by the
Counter Frozen and Reset property.
Decreasing the polling frequency decreases the counter update time
and increases the available communication bandwidth. This property
should be set to a value less then or equal to the desired maximum
counter data update time.

Checksum This property specifies the error checking method used for the SC1801
Method message security. The SC1801 Client supports the following error
checking methods:

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 252

 • Longitudinal Parity Check (LPC).
• Longitudinal Parity Check (LPC) with the final reversed.
• Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) using the polynomial:
x16 + x15 + x2 + 1

Counter This property enables or disables the Freeze and Reset (SC1801 AFR
Freeze and command) sent to the SC1801 device prior to reading the contents of
Reset the counter.

SOE Correct This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to adjust the SOE time
Time tags received from the SC1801 device. The valid range is -107 to 108
milliseconds, with a default setting of 0 (correction disabled).

SC1801 Device
Property The SC1801 Device properties are accessed by selecting the SC1801
Window device in the System Management window. The SC1801 Client Device
property window is shown in Figure 3-107.

Figure 3-107: SC1801 Client Device

Device This is the remote device SC1801 address which must be unique within
Address a SC1801 Client when a multi-drop connection is used. DAPStudio
uses the Manufacturer, Device Model, and Device Address to reference
a device, for example: GE -D20:3

Restart This the time, in seconds, between restart attempts. The valid range is
Delay 0 to 100000 seconds with a default value of 30 seconds.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 253

Retry Times This property specifies the maximum number of retries for the
application layer when a valid application query response is not
received. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default setting of 0 (retries
disabled).

Query This is the time, in milliseconds, to wait for the SC1801 device to
Timeout respond to a query. The valid range is 100 to 3600000 milliseconds with
a default setting of 1000 (1 second).

Time Sync. This is the frequency, in seconds; the DAPserver™ time synchronizes
Period the SC1801 device. The valid range is 1 to 3600000 seconds and
disabled (default setting of -1).

Period for This is the frequency, in seconds, a Data Request Full (DRF) poll is
Interrogating sent to the SC1801 device. The valid range is 0 to 1000000, with a
default of 0 (poll only on SC1801 device restart). Decreasing the polling
frequency decreases the data update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less
then or equal to the desired maximum data update time.

Dead Band This property is the dead band used by the SC1801 device to report
analog input measurements. The dead band is a 12-bit value in the
range 0 to 4095.

Select This is the timeout, in seconds, permitted between a select and operate
Timeout command sent by a Server application to this Client application. The
valid range is 1 to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 30 seconds.

Polling This property specifies the frequency, in milliseconds; the DAPserver™

Interval polls the SC1801 device for data. The valid range is 10 to 100000, with
a default of 1000 (1 second). Decreasing the polling frequency
decreases the data update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less
then or equal to the desired maximum data update time.

Auto Output This property specifies the delay, in seconds, before automatically
Delay outputting the AO points, based on the value of the associated AI
points.

Auto DO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

Period the state of a DI or event point and the issue of an output on the
associated DO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the DO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Auto AO This property specifies the period, in milliseconds, between a change in

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 254

Period the state of an AI or counter point and the issue of an output on the
associated AO point. If a value of 0 is selected, an output on the AO
point is issued as soon as the value of its associated point is changed.

Communic- The number of automatic retries the DAPserver™ performs before

ation Fail communication with the SC1801 device is failed. The total
communication attempts performed is one greater then this value,
which equates to the initial attempt plus the retries. The value range of
automatic retries is 0 (retries disabled) to 10000. The default setting is 3
retries.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-108
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements retrieved from a
SC1801 device.

Figure 3-108: SC1801 Client Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SC1801 Client Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input requested from the SC1801 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Slot No This is the SC1801 device configuration slot number where this analog
input is located. The configuration slot number is a one byte value in the
range 0 to 255 with a default value of 1. The SC1801 Client uses the
Slot No in conjunction with the Point Index to reference the analog input
in the SC1801 device

Point Index This property specifies the point location on the configuration board
identified by the Slot No. The valid range for the analog input Point
Index is 0 to 12 with a default value of 0.

Data Format This property indicates the data format the SC1801 device will use to
report the analog input value. The following analog input formats are
supported:
• Bi-polar
• Uni-polar
• 4 - 20 mA

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 255

 • LS 12 bit

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure 3-109,
Window is used to specify the digital input indications retrieved from a SC1801
device.

Figure 3-109: SC1801 Client Digital Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SC1801 Client Digital Input I/O Parameters
table for each digital input requested from the SC1801 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Slot No This is the SC1801 device configuration slot number where this digital
input is located. The configuration slot number is a one-byte value in the
range 0 to 255 with a default value of 1. The SC1801 Client uses the
Slot No in conjunction with the Point Index to reference the digital input
in the SC1801 device

Point Index This property specifies the point location on the configuration board
identified by the Slot No. The valid range for the digital input Point Index
is 0 to 24 with a default value of 1.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter Input I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure
Window 3-110, is used to specify the counter inputs retrieved from a SC1801
device.

Figure 3-110: SC1801 Client Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SC1801 Client Counter I/O Parameters table
for each counter requested from the SC1801 device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 256

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Slot No This is the SC1801 device configuration slot number where this counter
is located. The configuration slot number is a one-byte value in the
range 0 to 255 with a default value of 1. The SC1801 Client uses the
Slot No in conjunction with the Point Index to reference the counter in
the SC1801 device

Point Index This property specifies the point location on the configuration board
identified by the Slot No. The valid range for the counter Point Index is 0
to 7 with a default value of 1.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure
Window 3-111, is used to operate the digital outputs in a SC1801 device.

Figure 3-111: SC1801 Client Analog Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SC1801 Client Analog Output I/O Parameters
table for each analog output set in the SC1801 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Slot No This is the SC1801 device configuration slot number where this analog
output is located. The configuration slot number is a one-byte value in
the range 0 to 255 with a default value of 1. The SC1801 Client uses
the Slot No in conjunction with the Point Index to reference the analog
output in the SC1801 device

Point Index This property specifies the point location on the configuration board
identified by the Slot No. The valid range for the analog output Point
Index is 0 to 8 with a default value of 1.

Data Format This property indicates the data format the SC1801 Client will use to
send the analog output to the remote device. The following analog input
formats are supported:
• Bi-polar

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 257

 • Uni-polar
• 4 - 20 mA
• LS 12 bit

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter mapping table, shown in Figure
Window 3-112, is used to operate the digital outputs in a SC1801 device.

Figure 3-112: SC1801 Client Digital Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the SC1801 Client Digital Output I/O Parameters
table for each digital output operated in the SC1801 device.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Slot No This is the SC1801 device configuration slot number where this digital
output is located. The configuration slot number is a one-byte value in
the range 0 to 255 with a default value of 1. The SC1801 Client uses
the Slot No in conjunction with the Point Index to reference the digital
output in the SC1801 device

Point Index This property specifies the point location on the configuration board
identified by the Slot No. The valid range for the digital output Point
Index is 0 to 31 with a default value of 1.

Output Type This digital output will be operated using of the following methods:
• TRD Output
• LDO Output
• CCO Output
• Binary Regulating Step

Duration This is the duration, in milliseconds, the output is operated. This

property is only applicable to pulse controls. The valid range is 1 to
1000000 milliseconds with a default value of 1000 (1 second).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 258

Single Point The SC1801 control arm and execute sequence supports a single
Command output, therefore a trip/close operation may require two separate
controls. There is a vendor specific implementation which uses a spare
bit to designate the trip or close operation.
The SC1801 raise and lower operations support a single output;
therefore, separate controls are also required. There is a vendor
specific implementation, which uses a spare bit to designate the raise or
lower operation.
The standard SC1801 message structure is used when this property is
enabled. Separate trip and close outputs are required when the Output
Type specifies a trip/close operation. Separate raise and lower outputs
are required when the Output Type specifies a raise/lower operation.
The extended SC1801 message structure is used when this property is
disabled. A single trip and close output is required when the Output
Type specifies a trip/close operation. A single raise and lower output is
required when the Output Type specifies a raise/lower operation.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 259

Server Applications
Server Server Communication protocols usually respond to requests and
Protocols commands initiated by a remote Client. The Server communication
protocol returns requested information and performs received
commands. Some advanced Server communication protocols may also
initiate communications by spontaneously transmitting data.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 260

Server Application Basics
Overview This section describes the properties which are common to all Server
communication protocols. The Server communication protocol specific
properties are described in the following sections.

Server Application Summary

Overview The Application Summary properties are accessed by selecting the
Server instance in the System Management window. A sample Server
Application Summary property window is shown in Figure 3-113.

Figure 3-113: Server Application Summary

Object Name This property specifies the name of this Server instance in the Real-
Time Database. Each Object Name is unique in the DAPserver™.

Power On This property specifies the delay, in seconds; the Server will pause after
Delay a restart before responding to the remote Client. The valid range is 0
(power on delay disabled) to 3600 seconds with a default setting of
“Disable”.

Standby When this property is enabled, the standby CPU Server application will
CPU Server respond to poll requests from the remote Client. In this mode, both the
Action active and standby CPU are capable of responding to the remote Client.

When disabled, the standby CPU discards poll requests from the
remote Client. In this mode only the active CPU is capable of
responding to the remote Client.
This property only applies to redundant configurations using
serial channels. This property does not apply to LAN based
communications (TCP and UDP).

Standby When this property is enabled, the standby CPU can receive
CPU commands which are passed on the active CPU. The active will CPU
Command will execute the command; send the result to the standby CPU to return
Process to the initiating remote Client. In this mode, both the active and standby
CPUs will accept commands.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 261

 When disabled, the standby CPU discards commands from the remote
Client. In this mode only the active CPU is capable of accepting
commands.
This property only applies to redundant configurations using
serial channels. This property does not apply to LAN based
communications (TCP and UDP).

Server Application Pseudo Points

Overview The DAPserver™ maintains a set of internal data points (pseudo points)
for each Server application. These pseudo points, described in the
following sections, are full function I/O points, available to the
DAPserver™ applications; for example, HMI, logic.

Adding a The process to add Server Application Pseudo Points is similar to the
Pseudo Client Application process.
Point

Copying a The process to copy Server Application Pseudo Points is similar to the
Pseudo Client Application process.
Point

Deleting a The process to delete Server Application Pseudo Points is similar to the
Pseudo Client Application process.
Point

Basic Information
Property The Server Application System Pseudo Point Basic Information window
Window and properties are similar to the Client Application System Pseudo
Point Basic Information window.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the Server
Window Application pseudo points. A sample Server Application Pseudo Point
Value window is shown in Figure 3-114.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 262

 Figure 3-114: Server Pseudo Point Value

Value (Redundant System)

Property This window is used for a redundant configuration and provides a
Window continuously updated view of the Server Application pseudo points. A
sample Server Application Pseudo Point Value window, for a redundant
system, is shown in Figure 3-115.

Figure 3-115: Redundant System Server Pseudo Point Value

The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time are reported
independently for each CPU.

Server Application System Pseudo Points

Overview The following sections describe the default Server Application System
pseudo points. These pseudo points are available for all of the Server
communication protocols.

Running This pseudo digital input indicates the current state of each Server
Status Application. The DAPserver™ scheduler will set the value of this
pseudo digital input.

Channel 1 This pseudo digital input report the presence of configuration errors in
Config the first communication channel parameters. The Server application
Error? checks the first channel configuration parameters and sets this pseudo
digital input accordingly.

Channel 2 This pseudo digital input report the presence of configuration errors in
the second communication channel parameters. The Server application

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 263

Config checks the second channel configuration parameters and sets this
Error? pseudo digital input accordingly.

Channel 3 This pseudo digital input report the presence of configuration errors in
Config the third communication channel parameters. The Server application
Error? checks the third channel configuration parameters and sets this pseudo
digital input accordingly.

Channel 4 This pseudo digital input report the presence of configuration errors in
Config the fourth communication channel parameters. The Server application
Error? checks the fourth channel configuration parameters and sets this
pseudo digital input accordingly.

Protocol This pseudo digital input reports the presence of configuration errors in
Config the Server Protocol Parameter table. The Server application driver
Error? verifies the protocol parameters and set this pseudo digital input
accordingly.

Application This pseudo digital input indicates the Server application is authorized.
Access Authorization is determined by the Server application checking the
hardware authority key to determine the value of this pseudo digital
input. If no authorization is found, the DAPserver™ scheduler will not
start the Server application.

Analog Inputs

Basic Information
Window The Server Analog Input Basic Information properties, shown in Figure
Property 3-116, are common for all Server protocols and are used to define the
analog inputs reported by the Server Application.

Figure 3-116: Server Application Analog Input Basic

Information

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 264

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Value Type This property specifies the date type the Server application will use
when reporting the analog input. The valid analog input data types are:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer
• Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point

RTDB Point This property references the RTDB point whose value is reported for
the analog input. A custom window allows you to associate the analog
input to any analog input or counter available in the DAPserver™.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the analog inputs
Window mapped into the Server Application. A sample Server Application
Analog Input Value window is shown in Figure 3-117.

Figure 3-117: Server Application Analog Input Value

The Server Application Analog Input Value properties are similar to
Client Applications.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 265

Value (Redundant System)
Property This window is used for a redundant configuration and provides a
Window continuously updated view of the analog inputs mapped into the Server
Application. A sample Server Application Analog Input Value window,
for a redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-118.

Figure 3-118: Redundant System Server Analog Input Value

The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time are reported
independently for each CPU.

Digital Inputs

Basic Information
Property The Server Digital Input Basic Information properties, shown in Figure
Window 3-119, are common for all Server protocols and used to define the
digital inputs reported by the Server Application.

Figure 3-119: Server Application Digital Input Basic

Information

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital input.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 266

Description

Value Type This property specifies the date type the Server application will use
when reporting the digital input. The valid digital input data types are:
• Single point status
• Double point status

RTDB Point This property references the RTDB point whose value is reported for
the digital input. A custom window allows you to associate the digital
input to any digital input available in the DAPserver™.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the digital inputs
Window mapped into the Server Application. A sample Server Application Digital
Input Value window is shown in Figure 3-120.

Figure 3-120: Server Application Digital Input Value

The Server Application Digital Input Value properties are similar to
Client Applications.

Value (Redundant System)

Property This window is used for a redundant configuration and provides a
Window continuously updated view of the digital inputs mapped into the Server
Application. A sample Server Application Digital Input Value window, for
a redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-121.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 267

 Figure 3-121: Redundant System Server Digital Input Value
The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time are reported
independently for each CPU.

Counters

Basic Information
Property The Server Counter Basic Information properties, shown in Figure
Window 3-122, are common for all Server protocols and used to define the
counters reported by the Server Application.

Figure 3-122: Server Application Counter Basic Information

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Value Type This property specifies the date type the Server application will use
when reporting the counter. The valid counter data types are:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer
• Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 268

RTDB Point This property references the RTDB point whose value is reported for
the counter. A custom window allows you to associate the counter to
any analog input or counter available in the DAPserver™.

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the counters
Window mapped into the Server Application. A sample Server Application
Counter Value window is shown in Figure 3-123.

Figure 3-123: Server Application Counter Value

The Server Application Counter Value properties are similar to Client
Applications.

Value (Redundant System)

Property This window is used for a redundant configuration and provides a
Window continuously updated view of the counters mapped into the Server
Application. A sample Server Application Counter Value window, for a
redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-124.

Figure 3-124: Redundant System Server Counter Value

The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time are reported
independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 269

Analog Outputs

Basic Information
Property The Server Analog Output Basic Information properties, shown in
Window Figure 3-125, are common for all Server protocols and are used to
define the analog outputs reported by the Server Application.

Figure 3-125: Server Application Analog Output Basic

Information

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog output.

Description

Value Type This property specifies the date type the Server application will use
when operating the analog output. The valid analog output data types
are:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Signed long integer
• Short (32-bit IEEE format) floating point
• Double (64-bit IEEE format) floating point

RTDB Point This property references the RTDB point associated with the analog
output. A custom window allows you to associate the analog output to
any analog output available in the DAPserver™.

Value

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 270

Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the analog
Window outputs mapped into the Server Application. A sample Server
Application Analog Output Value window is shown in Figure 3-126.

Figure 3-126: Server Application Analog Output Value

The Server Application Analog Output Value properties are similar to
Client Applications.

Value (Redundant System)

Property This window is used for a redundant configuration and provides a
Window continuously updated view of the analog outputs mapped into the
Server Application. A sample Server Application Analog Output Value
window, for a redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-127.

Figure 3-127: Redundant System Server Analog Output Value

The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time are reported
independently for each CPU.

Digital Outputs

Basic Information
Property The Server Digital Output Basic Information properties, shown in Figure
Window 3-128, are common for all Server protocols and are used to define the
digital outputs reported by the Server Application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 271

 Figure 3-128: Server Application Digital Output Basic
Information

Reference The Reference Name respresents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital output.

Description

Open Output This property references the RTDB point associated with the digital
DO output for a close operation. A custom window allows you to associate
the digital output to any digital output, digital input or analog input
available in the DAPserver™.

Close Output This property references the RTDB point associated with the digital
DO output for an open operation. A custom window allows you to associate
the digital output to any digital output, digital input or analog input
available in the DAPserver™.

Operation The digital output can be operated as a:

Method • Trip/close an output in the remote device
• Regulating step operation in the remote device
• Reset the remote device
• Freeze the counters in the remote device

Value
Property This window provides a continuously updated view of the digital outputs
Window mapped into the Server Application. A sample Server Application Digital
Output Value window is shown in Figure 3-129.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 272

 Figure 3-129: Server Application Digital Output Value
The Server Application Digital Output Value properties are similar to
Client Applications.

Value (Redundant System)

Property This window is used for a redundant configuration and provides a
Window continuously updated view of the digital outputs mapped into the Server
Application. A sample Server Application Digital Output Value window,
for a redundant system, is shown in Figure 3-130.

Figure 3-130: Redundant System Server Digital Output Value

The Value, Quality, Modify Date and Modify Time are reported
independently for each CPU.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 273

IEC® 60870-5-101
Server The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server returns information and accepts
commands from a higher order IEC® 60870-5-101 Client. The IEC®
60870-5-101 Server supports multiple addressing and co-exist with
other IEC® 60870-5-101 devices on a single communication channel.

IEC® 60870-5-101 Host

Property One or more communication channel can be assigned to an IEC®
Window 60870-5-101 Server instance. A maximum of three alternate
communication channels can be assigned to an IEC® 60870-5-101
Server instance.
The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Host Parameter table, shown in Figure
3-131 is used to specify the communication channels.

Figure 3-131: IEC® 60870-5-101 Host

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Host table for each
communication channel.

Host Name This property specifies a unique name to identify the communication
channel.

Control When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Operation disable the acceptance and processing of digital output commands on
®
Authorization this channel. This IEC 60870-5-101 Server will accept digital output
commands when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and reject
the commands when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Set When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Operation disable the acceptance and processing of analog output commands on
®
Authorization this channel. This IEC 60870-5-101 Server will accept analog output
commands when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and reject
the commands when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Time Sync. When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Authorization disable the acceptance
®
and processing of time synchronization on this
channel. This IEC 60870-5-101 Server will accept time
synchronization commands when the specified digital input is set
(logical 1) and reject the commands when the digital input is cleared
(logical 0).

Shared When this property is enabled, a common event buffer is used for the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 274

Event Buffer primary and redundant communication channel. An event is reported
once, using the active communication channel.
When this property is disabled, each communication channel has an
independent event buffer. An event may be reported using each
communication channel. By default, the Shared Event Buffer parameter
is disabled.

Host This property specifies the pseudo digital input used to indicate the
Communica- communication status for this IEC® 60870-5-101 Server communication
tion Status channel. This property operates in conjunction with the following Off-line
Timeout property.

Off-line This property specifies the time, in seconds, the IEC® 60870-5-101
Timeout Server will wait for a valid message before declaring this
communication channel failed. Communication is operational when the
IEC® 60870-5-101 Server receives a valid message during this period.
The valid range is 0 (disable function) to 3600 seconds with a default
setting of 60 seconds.

Server This is the device address for this IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. If the link
Address address of the receiving frame from this remote Client does not match
this address, the Server will not respond the query. The controlled
station address must be in the range 1 to 65535.

Check FCB This property enables or disables FCB (Frame Count Bit) checking. The
default setting is enabled.

IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol Parameter

Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-
Window 101 Server Protocol Parameter option in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Protocol Parameter property
window is shown in Figure 3-132.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 275

 Figure 3-132: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Protocol Parameter

Cyclic This property enables or disables the periodic transmission of data.

Transmission When this function is enabled, the data is transmitted at the frequency
specified in the Group Info table (see 0for more information). The Cyclic
Transmission is disabled by default.

Link Timeout This is the minimum waiting time, in milliseconds, to wait for a data link
confirm frame or response. The valid range is 100 to 10000000
milliseconds with a default setting of 4000 (4 seconds).

Link Delay This is the minimum amount of time, in milliseconds, between response
frames to the remote Client. The valid range is 10 to 108 milliseconds
with a default setting of 10.

Single Char This property enables or disables single character acknowledges; by

Frame default, Single Char Frame is enabled.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the link layer address for
Link the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. The link address must be one or two
Address bytes; with one byte being the default value.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Common Address of
ASDU for the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. Table 3-52 defines the

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 276

Common available common addresses for each option; one, two, three or four
Address byte Common Address of ASDU. The default length is set to one byte.
Table 3-52: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Common Address
Length of Common Common Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 1 to 254 with 0 and 255
reserved for broadcast common address.
2 bytes The valid range is 1 to 65534 with 0 and
65535 reserved for broadcast common
address.
3 bytes The valid range is 1 to 16777214 with 0
and 16777215 reserved for broadcast
common address.
4 bytes The valid range is 1 to 4294967294 with 0
and 4294967295 reserved for broadcast
common address.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Cause of Transmission
COT (COT) field. The Cause of Transmission can be one or two bytes; with
one byte being the default value.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Information Object
Info. Object Address for the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. Table 3-53 defines the
Address available information object addresses for each option; one, two, three,
or four byte addresses. The default length is set to two bytes.
Table 3-53: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Information Object
Address
Length of Info Object Information Object Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 0 to 255.
2 bytes The valid range is 0 to 65535.
3 bytes The valid range is 0 to 16777215.
4 bytes The valid range is 0 to 4294967295.

Time Type This property specifies the time and date format used by the IEC®
60870-5-101 Server for reporting digital and analog inputs. The
following time and date formats are available:
• CPTime562a - IEC® 60870-5-101 seven octet binary time
(default value).
• CPTime242a - IEC® 60870-5-101 three octet binary time.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 277

Transmission This property
®
specifies the method used to transfer the counters using
of Integrated the IEC 60870-5-101 Server. The following methods are supported for
Totals reporting the counter data:
• Disable – Counters are not reported b the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server.
• Mode A - The DAPserver™ forms a local freeze and uses
unsolicited messaging to report the counter data (default
setting).
• Mode B - The DAPserver™ performs a local freeze and is polled
for the counter data.
• Mode C - The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server receives a freeze and
poll for the counter data.
• Mode D - The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server receives a freeze and
uses unsolicited messaging to report the counter data.

Counter When enabled, this property instructs the DAPserver™ to reset this
Reset counter after the counter has been successfully transmitted to the IEC®
60870-5-101 Host. This property is only applied when the Transmission
of Integrated Totals property is set to Mode A or Mode B.

Counter This property specifies the time and date format used by the IEC®
Time Format 60870-5-101 Server for reporting counters. The following time and date
formats are available:
• Disable – No time and date information is returned with the
counter (default setting).
• CPTime562a - IEC® 60870-5-101 seven octet binary time.
• CPTime242a - IEC® 60870-5-101 three octet binary time.

Negative This property specifies the format this IEC® 60870-5-101 channel will
Value use when reporting negative values. The default setting is the more
Format commonly used two’s complement format. The alternate, Direct setting
sets the most significant sign bit to 1.

Group Info Refer to Group Info for detailed information on the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server Group Information table.

Counter Refer to 0Counter Group Info for detailed information on the IEC®
Group Info 60870-5-101 Server Counter Group Information table.

EI Frame Enabling this property instructs the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server to send
an End of Initialization frame after processing the reset link command.
By default, the EI Frame parameter is enabled.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 278

Back Scan This property specifies the time interval, in seconds, for the IEC®
Period 60870-5-101 Server to send background scan frames. The valid range
is 1 to 1000000 with -1 reserved to disable background scans. The
default setting is disabled.

Station Call Upon receipt of a General Interrogation command the IEC® 60870-5-
Term Frame 101 Server will send a General Interrogation confirm followed by the
ASDUs. This property specifies whether the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server
will send a station call termination frame at the end of the General
Interrogation. The valid options are “Disable” and “Enable” as the
default.
This property enables the DAPserver™ to satisfy the 1995 and
2003 editions of the IEC® 60870-5-101 specifications.

Time Format This property specifies the time format used by the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server. The valid settings are UTC and local time zone, with the local
time zone being the default.
Refer to the Advanced Configuration Tool for information on
setting the time zone.

Packed When enabled, this property instructs the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server to
Single Point return single point information using a packed information object. Single
Information point information is returned in individual information objects when this
property is disabled. By default, the Packed Single Point Information is
disabled.

Parameter This property is used to specify the group used to report the
Group parameters. The valid range is group 1 to 16 with 0 used to disable
parameter reporting. The Parameter Group is disabled by default.
The parameter group cannot be allocated in the Group Info
table.

Send Event This property specifies how the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server will respond
After when a new event occurs during the response to an interrogation. The
Interrogating default “Enable” setting will buffer and send the new events after the
Call interrogation has been completed. The “Disable” setting will instruct the
IEC® 60870-5-101 Server to send new events during the interrogation
response.

Online/Offline This property disables/enables the event sending when the quality of
Change its value changes.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 279

Group Info
Property The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Group Info properties are accessed by
Window selecting the IEC® 60870-5-101 device in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Group Info property window is
shown in Figure 3-133.

Figure 3-133: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Group Info

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Group Info table
for each group reported by the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. A maximum
of 16 records (object groups) is permitted per IEC® 60870-5-101 Server.

Property ID This property specifies the group number for this set of information
objects. The group number must be in the range 1 to 16.

Start Index This property specifies the point index for the first object within this
group. The Start Index operates in conjunction with the End Index
property to define the range of point indices assigned to this group.

End Index This property specifies the point index for the last object within this
group. All points greater than or equal to the Start Index and less than
or equal to the End Index are included in this group.

Reporting This property specifies the frequency, in seconds, the IEC® 60870-5-
Period 101 Server transmits this group. The valid range is 0 to 3600000, with a
default of 0 (disable). Decreasing this period decreases this group
update time and increases the available communication bandwidth.
This property should be set to a value less than or equal to the desired
maximum group update time.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 280

Counter Group Info
Property The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter Group Info properties are
Window accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-101 device in the System
Management window. The IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter Group
Info property window is shown in Figure 3-134.

Figure 3-134: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter Group Info

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter Group Info
table for each group reported by the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. A
maximum of 4 records (counter groups) is permitted per IEC® 60870-5-
101 Server.

Property ID This property specifies the counter group number, which must be in the
range 1 to 4.

Start Index This property specifies the point index for the first counter within this
counter group. The Start Index operates in conjunction with the End
Index property to define the range of point indices assigned to this
counter group.

End Index This property specifies the point index for the last counter within this
counter group. All points greater than or equal to the Start Index and
less than or equal to the End Index are included in this counter group.

Reporting This property specifies the frequency, in seconds, the IEC® 60870-5-
Period 101 Server freezes and transmits this counter group. The valid range is
0 to 3600000, with a default of 0 (disable). Decreasing this period
decreases this group update time and increases the available
communication bandwidth. This property should be set to a value less
than or equal to the desired maximum group update time.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-135
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements returned by the
DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 281

 Figure 3-135: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Input I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Input I/O
Parameters table for each analog input reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address analog input. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol
Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for more
information).

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this analog input. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Protocol Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for
more information). Table 3-53 summarizes the Information Object
Addresses available for each information object address length.

ASDU Type The ASDU type used to transfer the analog input to the DAPserver™.
The available analog input ASDU types are:
• Normalized value
• Scaled value
• Short floating point number
• Normalized value without quality descriptor
• Step position information

The IEC® 60870-5-101 ASDU type is determined by the Time Tag for
this analog input and the Time Type for this IEC® 60870-5-101 Server.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 282

 Table 3-54: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Input ASDU Type
Time Disabled CP24Time2a CP56Time2a
M_ME_NA_1 <9> M_ME_NA_1 <9>
M_ME_NB_1 <11> M_ME_NB_1 <11>
M_ME_NC_1 <13> M_ME_NC_1 <13>
M_ME_ND_1 <21> M_ME_ND_1 <21>
M_ST_NA_1 <5> M_ST_NA_1 <5>

Periodic/ When enabled, the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server uses Periodic/Cyclic

Cyclic (COT = 1) to report this analog input. When disabled, the IEC® 60870-
5-101 Server uses an alternate method; for example, Spontaneous
(COT = 3).

Time Tag Enabling this property will instruct the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server to
return time tagged information when reporting this analog input. The
Time Format property, in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol Parameter
table, defines the time tagged information.

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the value stored in the
DAPserver™ database for transmission in the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server response. The analog input scaling is defined in Equation 3-4.

Equation 3-4: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Input Scaling

The default setting is 0, which effectively disables the Offset.

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -100000 to 100000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

Event This property contains the default dead band the IEC® 60870-5-101
Deadband Server uses to report this analog input when the Transmission Method
is set to Spontaneous. The controlling station may down load a new
dead band value.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-136,
Window is used to specify the digital input values returned by the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 283

 Figure 3-136: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Digital Input I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Digital Input I/O
Parameters table for each digital input reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital input.

Description

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address digital input. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol
Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for more
information).

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this digital input. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Protocol Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for
more information). Table 3-53 summarizes the Information Object
Addresses available for each information object address length.

ASDU Type The ASDU type used to transfer this digital input to the DAPserver™.
The available digital input ASDU types are:
• Single point information
• Double point information

The IEC® 60870-5-101 ASDU type is determined by the COS/SOE

properties for this digital input and the Time Type for this IEC® 60870-5-
101 Server.

Periodic/ When enabled, the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server uses Periodic/Cyclic

(COT = 1) to report this digital input. When disabled, the IEC® 60870-5-

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 284

Cyclic 101 Server uses an alternate method; for example, Spontaneous (COT
= 3).

Auto. SOE A remote device normally reports the SOE information. This property
will enable or disable the generation of SOE events for cases where this
is not possible. The following options are available:
• Disable – SOE events are not created.
• Enable when open – SOE events are only created when this
digital input transitions to the open state.
• Enable when close – SOE events are only created when this
digital input transitions to the closed state.
• Enable when changed – SOE events are created whenever this
digital input changes state.

COS This property enables or disables the reporting of COS information by

this IEC® 60870-5-101 Server. When both COS and SOE reporting is
enabled, the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server with report the COS first,
followed by the SOE. This is a special case, for some remote Clients,
which require a COS to be sent prior to the SOE.

SOE This property enables or disables the reporting of SOE information by

this IEC® 60870-5-101 Server.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-137 is
Window used to specify the counter values returned by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-137: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter I/O
Parameters table for each counter reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 285

Name

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address counter. The Common Address range is dependent upon the Length of
Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol Parameter
table (see the Protocol Parameter section for more information).

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this counter. The Information Object Address range is dependent upon
the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101
Protocol Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for more
information). Table 3-53 summarizes the Information Object Addresses
available for each information object address length.

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the counter stored in the
DAPserver™ database for transmission in the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server response. The counter scaling is defined in Equation 3-5.

Equation 3-5: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Counter Scaling

The default setting is 0, which effectively disables the Offset.

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -100000 to 100000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure
Window 3-138 is used to specify the IEC® 60870-5-101 analog output
commands accepted by the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 286

 Figure 3-138: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Output I/O
Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Output I/O
Parameters table for each analog output command accepted by the
DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog output.

Description

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address analog output. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol
Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for more
information).

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this analog output. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Protocol Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for
more information). Table 3-53 summarizes the Information Object
Addresses available for each information object address length.

ASDU Type The ASDU type used to transfer this analog output to the DAPserver™.
The available analog output ASDU types are listed in Table 3-55.
Table 3-55: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Output ASDU
Type
ASDU Type Description
C_SE_NA_1 <48> Set point command, normalized value
C_SE_NB_1 <49> Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NC_1 <50> Set point command, short floating point
number

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 287

Direct This feature will be documented in a later release of this document.
Control

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the received IEC® 60870-5-
101 value prior to setting the analog output value. The analog output
scaling is defined in Equation 3-6.

Equation 3-6: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Analog Output Scaling

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is 0.00001 to 10000 with a default of 1, which effectively disables
the Divisor.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-139
Window is used to specify the IEC® 60870-5-101 digital output commands
accepted by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-139: IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Digital Output I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Digital Output I/O
Parameters table for each digital output command accepted by the
DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital output.

Description

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 288

Common This property specifies the Common Address of ASDU used for this
Address digital output. The Common Address range is dependent upon the
Length of Common Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-101 Protocol
Parameter table (see the Protocol Paramter section for more
information).

Point Index This property specifies the Information Object Address associated with
this digital output. The Information Object Address range is dependent
upon the Length of Info Object Address setting in the IEC® 60870-5-
101 Protocol Parameter table (see the Protocol Parameter section for
more information). Table 3-53 summarizes the Information Object
Addresses available for each information object address length.

Direct This property specifies the transmission applied for this digital output.
Control When this property is disabled, select and execute is used to operate
this digital output. When this property is enabled, a direct command is
used to operate this digital output.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 289

IEC® 60870-5-104
Server The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server returns information and accepts
commands from a higher order IEC® 60870-5-104 Client. The IEC®
60870-5-104 Server supports multiple addressing and co-exist with
other IEC® 60870-5-104 devices on a single communication channel.

IEC® 60870-5-104 Host

Property One or more communication channel can be assigned to an IEC®
Window 60870-5-104 Server instance. A maximum of three alternate
communication channels can be assigned to an IEC® 60870-5-104
Server instance.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Host Parameter table, shown in Figure
3-140 is used to specify the communication channels.

Figure 3-140: IEC® 60870-5-104 Host

There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Host table for each
communication channel.

Host Name This property specifies a unique name to identify the communication
channel.

Control When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically

Operation enable or disable the acceptance and processing of digital
®
Authorization output commands on this channel. This IEC 60870-5-104
Server will accept digital output commands when the specified
digital input is set (logical 1) and will reject the digital output
commands when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Set When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically

Operation enable or disable the acceptance and processing of analog
®
Authorization output commands on this channel. This IEC 60870-5-104
Server will accept analog output commands when the specified
digital input is set (logical 1) and will reject the digital output
commands when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Time Sync. When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically
Authorization enable or disable the acceptance and processing of time
synchronization on this channel. This IEC® 60870-5-104 Server
will accept time synchronization commands when the specified
digital input is set (logical 1) and will reject the digital output
commands when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 290

Shared When this property is enabled, a common event buffer is used for the
Event Buffer primary and redundant communication channel. An event is reported
once, using the active communication channel.
When this property is disabled, each communication channel has an
independent event buffer. An event may be reported using each
communication channel.

Host This property specifies the pseudo digital input used to indicate the
Communica- communication status for this IEC® 60870-5-104 Server communication
tion Status channel. This property operates in conjunction with the following Off-line
Timeout property.

Off-line This property specifies the time, in seconds, the IEC® 60870-5-104
Timeout Server will wait for a valid message before declaring this
communication channel has failed. Communication is operational when
the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server receives a valid message during this
period. The valid range is 0 (function disable) to 3600 seconds with a
default setting of 60 seconds.

Host This is the host IP address this IEC® 60870-5-104 Server will respond
Address to.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-
Window 104 Server Protocol Parameter option in the System Management
window. The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Protocol Parameter property
window is shown in Figure 3-141.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 291

 Figure 3-141: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Protocol Parameter

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Common Address of
Common ASDU for the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server. Table 3-56 defines the
Address available common addresses for each option: one, two, three or four
byte Common Address of ASDU.
Table 3-56: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Common Address
Length of Common Common Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 1 to 254 with 0 and 255
reserved for broadcast common address.
2 bytes The valid range is 1 to 65534 with 0 and
65535 reserved for broadcast common
address.
3 bytes The valid range is 1 to 16777214 with 0
and 16777215 reserved for broadcast
common address.
4 bytes The valid range is 1 to 4294967294 with 0
and 4294967295 reserved for broadcast
common address.

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Cause of Transmission
COT (COT) field. The Cause of Transmission can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes with a
default setting of 2.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 292

Length of This property specifies the size, in bytes, of the Information Object
Info. Object Address for the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server. Table 3-57 defines the
Address available information object addresses for each option: one, two, three,
or four byte addresses.
Table 3-57: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Information Object
Address
Length of Info Object Information Object Address
Address
1 byte The valid range is 0 to 255.
2 bytes The valid range is 0 to 65535.
3 bytes The valid range is 0 to 16777215.
4 bytes The valid range is 0 to 4294967295.

K This property specifies the maximum number of unconfirmed

information frames that the remote Client can buffer. The valid range is
1 to 32767 with a default setting of 12 information frames.

W This property specifies the maximum number of information frames the

remote Client can receive before an acknowledgement must be sent to
the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server The valid range is 1 to 32767 with a
default setting of 8 information frames. This property cannot exceed
two-thirds of K.

Transmission This property specifies the method used to transfer the counters
of Integrated using the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server. The following methods are
Totals supported for reporting the counter data:
• Disable – Counters are not reported by the IEC® 60870-
5-104 Server.
• Mode A - The DAPserver™ performs a local freeze and
uses unsolicited messaging to report the counter data.
• Mode B - The DAPserver™ performs a local freeze and is
polled for the counter data.
• Mode C - The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server receives a
freeze and poll for the counter data.
• Mode D - The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server receives a
freeze and uses unsolicited messaging to report the
counter data.

Counter When enabled, this property instructs the DAPserver™ to reset the
Reset counter after the counter has been successfully transmitted to the IEC®
60870-5-104 Host. This property is only applied when the Transmission
of Integrated Totals property is set to Mode A or Mode B.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 293

Cyclic This property enables or disables the periodic transmission of
Transmission data (see section 9.6 Basic Application Functions of the IEC
60870-5-104 specification). When this function is enabled, the
data is transmitted at the frequency specified in the Group Info
table (see 0for more information).

Spontaneous This property enables or disables the spontaneous transmission

Transmission of data (see section 9.6 Basic Application Functions of the IEC
60870-5-104 specification).

Negative This property specifies the format this IEC® 60870-5-104 channel will
Number use when reporting negative values. The default setting
Format (Complementary) is the more commonly used two’s complement
format. The alternate, Direct setting sets the most significant sign bit to
1.

Sequence This property enables or disables the sequence number checking of the
Check frames received from the remote Client. The default setting is enable
(Yes) and should only be changed for unique vendor implementations
that do not use this feature.

Group Info Refer to Group Info for detailed information on the IEC® 60870-5-104
Server Group Information table.

Counter Refer to 0Counter Group Info for detailed information on the IEC®
Group Info 60870-5-104 Server Counter Group Information table.

Time Format This property specifies the time format used by the IEC® 60870-5-104
Server. The valid settings are UTC and local time zone.
Refer to the System Menu section for information on setting the
time zone.

Back Scan This property specifies the tine interval, in seconds, for the IEC® 60870-
Period 5-104 Server to send background scan frames. The valid range is -1 to
10000000 with -1 reserved to disable background scans. The default
setting is -1.

Packed When enabled, this property instructs the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server to
Single Point return single point information using a packed information object. Single
Information point information is returned in individual information objects when this
property is disabled.

Parameter This property is used to specify the group used to report the
Group parameters. The valid range is group 1 to 16 with 0 used to disable

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 294

 parameter reporting.
The parameter group cannot be allocated in the Group Info
table.

Sending This property specifies how the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server will respond
Event After when a new event occurs during the response to an interrogation. The
Interrogation default, Enable setting will buffer and send the new events after the
Call interrogation has been completed. The Disable setting will instruct the
IEC® 60870-5-104 Server to send new events during the interrogation
response.

Counter This property specifies the time and date format used by the IEC®
Time Tag 60870-5-104 Server for reporting counters.

EI Frame This property enables or disables the transmission of “End of

Initialization” frames.

Online/Offline This property enables or disables the transmission of “End of

Change Initialization” frames.

Group Info
Property The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Group Info properties are accessed by
Window selecting the IEC® 60870-5-104 device in the System Management
window. There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Group
Info table for each group reported by the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server. A
maximum of 16 records (object groups) is permitted per IEC® 60870-5-
104 Server.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Group Info window and properties are
similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Application.

Counter Group Info

Property The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Counter Group Info properties are
Window accessed by selecting the IEC® 60870-5-104 device in the System
Management window. There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104
Server Counter Group Info table for each group reported by the IEC®
60870-5-104 Server. A maximum of 4 records (counter groups) is
permitted per IEC® 60870-5-104 Server.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Counter Group Info window and
properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server Application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 295

Analog Input I/O Parameters
Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-142
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements returned by the
DAPserver™.

Figure 3-142: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Analog Input I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Analog Input I/O
Parameters table for each analog input reported by the DAPserver™.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Application Analog Input I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server
Application.

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-143,
Window is used to specify the digital input values returned by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-143: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Digital Input I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Digital Input I/O
Parameters table for each digital input reported by the DAPserver™.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Application Digital Input I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server
Application.
:

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 296

Counter I/O Parameters
Property The Counter I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-144 is
Window used to specify the counter values returned by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-144: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Counter I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Analog Input I/O
Parameters table for each analog input reported by the DAPserver™.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Application Counter I/O Parameters
window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101 Server
Application.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure
Window 3-145 is used to specify the IEC® 60870-5-104 analog output
commands accepted by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-145: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Analog Output I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Analog Output I/O
Parameters table for each analog output command accepted by the
DAPserver™.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Application Analog Output I/O

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 297

 Parameters window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server Application.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-146
Window is used to specify the IEC® 60870-5-104 digital output commands
accepted by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-146: IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Digital Output I/O

Parameters
There is one record in the IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Digital Output I/O
Parameters table for each digital output command accepted by the
DAPserver™.
The IEC® 60870-5-104 Server Application Digital Output I/O
Parameters window and properties are similar to the IEC® 60870-5-101
Server Application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 298

DNP 3
Server The DNP 3 Server returns information and accepts commands from a
higher order DNP 3 Client. The DNP 3 Server supports multiple
addressing and co-exists with other DNP 3 devices on a single
communication channel.

DNP 3 Host
Property One or more communication channel can be assigned to a DNP 3
Window Server instance. A maximum of three alternate communication
channels can be assigned to a DNP 3 Server instance.
The DNP 3 Server Host Parameter table, shown in Figure 3-147 is used
to specify the communication channels.

Figure 3-147: DNP 3 Host

There is one record in the DNP 3 Server Host table for each
communication channel.

Host Name This property specifies a unique name to identify the communication
channel.

Control When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically

Operation enable/disable the acceptance and processing of digital output
Authorization commands on this channel. This DNP 3 Server will accept digital output
commands when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and
rejected when the specified digital input is clear (logical 0).

Set When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Operation disable the acceptance and processing of analog output commands on
Authorization this channel. This DNP 3 Server will accept analog output commands
when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and rejected when the
specified digital input is clear (logical 0).

Time Sync. When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Authorization disable the acceptance and processing of time synchronization on this
channel. This DNP 3 Server will accept time synchronization
commands when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and
rejected when the specified digital input is clear (logical 0).

Shared When this property is enabled, a common event buffer is used for the
Event Buffer primary and redundant communication channel. An event is reported
once, using the active communication channel.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 299

 When this property is disabled, each communication channel has an
independent event buffer. An event may be reported using each
communication channel.

Host This property specifies the pseudo digital input used to indicate the
Communica- communication status for this DNP 3 Server communication channel.
tion Status This property operates in conjunction with the following Off-line Timeout
property.

Off-line This property specifies the time, in seconds; the DNP 3 Server will wait
Timeout for a valid message before declaring this communication channel has
failed. Communication is operational when the DNP 3 Server receives a
valid message during this period. The valid range is 0 (disable function)
to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 60 seconds.

Server This is the device address for this DNP 3 Server and must be in the
Address range 1 to 65535.

Host This is the device address for the remote host and must be in the range
Address 1 to 65535.

Protocol Parameter
Property The protocol properties are accessed by selecting the DNP 3 Server
Window “Protocol Parameter” option in the System Management window. The
DNP 3 Server Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure
3-148.

Figure 3-148: DNP 3 Server Protocol Parameter

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 300

Data Link This is the maximum amount of time, in milliseconds; the DNP 3 Server
Confirm waits for a data link confirmation. If the confirm does not arrive within
Timeout the Data Link Confirm Timeout, the DNP 3 Server retries up to the
number of Max Data Link Retries. The valid range is 100 to 10000000
milliseconds with a default setting of 4000 (4 seconds).

Max. Data This property is the number of retries when a data link confirmation is
Link Retries not received from the DNP 3 remote Client. Communication failure
occurs when a valid response is not received for the total retries
specified in this property. The total communication attempts performed
is one greater than this value, which equates to the initial attempt plus
the retries. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default setting of 0 (disable
retries).

Transmission This property specifies the minimum waiting time, in milliseconds, after
Delay the DNP 3 Server sends a No-confirm data link frame to the remote
Client. The delay must be in the range 0 to 10000000 milliseconds.

Data Link This property enables or disables data link confirmation. When this
Confirm feature is enabled, the DNP 3 Server will use the SEND-CONFIRM
frame service. When this feature is disabled the DNP 3 Server will use
the SEND-NO-REPLY frame service.

Application This property specifies application layer confirmation. The following

Layer modes are supported:
Confirm • Never (Application confirmation is disabled)
• When Reporting Event Data
• When sending multi-fragment Responses

Application This property specifies the time, in milliseconds, to wait for an

Confirm application layer confirmation. The valid range is 100 to 10000000
Timeout milliseconds with a default setting of 2000 (2 seconds).

Max. This property specifies the maximum number of retries for the
Application application layer when a valid application query response is not
Layer received. The valid range is 0 to 10 with a default setting of 0 (disable
Retries retries).

Max. This property specifies the maximum package size, in bytes, for multi-
Application fragment application messages. The fragment size must be in the range
Fragment 256 to 4096; the default setting is 2048 bytes, which is recommended
Size for compatibility with current devices.

Unsolicited Refer to 0Unsolicited Responses for detailed information on the DNP

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 301

Response Server Unsolicited Response table.

Time Sync. This property specifies the frequency, in minutes; this DNP 3 Server will
request time synchronization from the remote Client. A setting of -1
disables this feature, while a setting of 0 instructs the DNP 3 Server to
only request time synchronization at start up. The valid range is -1 to
1000 minutes with a default value of 0.

Select This property is only for Select Before Operate commands and specifies
Timeout the time, in seconds; the DNP 3 Server will wait for an Operate
command after receiving the Select request. The valid range is 1 to 30
seconds with a default setting of 15 seconds.

Check App. When this function is enabled the DNP 3 Server checks the application
Layer layer sequence numbers. Polling between a Select and Operate
Sequence command is not allowed. When this function is disabled, the DNP 3
No. Server does not check the application layer sequence numbering.
Polling between a Select and Operate command is allowed. This is not
a normal practice and not implemented by most vendors. By default, the
Check App. Layer Sequence No. is enabled, and the standard practice
of application layer sequence number checking is used.

Online/Offline This property specifies the method the DNP 3 Server will use to report
Changes online and offline events. Online and offline event reporting can be
disabled or assigned to an event class (Class 1, 2, or 3).

Maximum This property specifies the maximum number of events buffered for this
Event Buffer DNP 3 Server. The valid range is 1000 to 25000 with a default buffer of
2000 events.

Unsolicited Responses
Property The DNP 3 Server Unsolicited Response table, shown in Figure 3-149
Window is used to define the unsolicited messages produced by the
DAPserver™

Figure 3-149: DNP 3 Server Unsolicited Responses

Class 1 Data This property enables or disables (default) the unsolicited reporting of
class 1 data. This property is used when the Silent Master feature is
disabled. Class 1 unsolicited reporting is enabled when the Silent
Master is enabled.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 302

Class 2 Data This property enables or disables (default) the unsolicited reporting of
class 2 data. This property is used when the Silent Master feature is
disabled. Class 2 unsolicited reporting is enabled when the Silent
Master is enabled.

Class 3 Data This property enables or disables (default) the unsolicited reporting of
class 3 data. This property is used when the Silent Master feature is
disabled. Class 3 unsolicited reporting is enabled when the Silent
Master is enabled.

Hold Time The Hold Time operates in conjunction with the Hold Count and Idle
Report Period to optimize unsolicited event reporting. The hold timer
starts upon the receipt of the first event in the buffer and specifies the
maximum time, in milliseconds; the event can be buffered. An
unsolicited message (containing the events to this point) is sent
whenever this timer expires. The valid range is 0 to 3600000
milliseconds with a default setting of 10000 (10 second).
Increasing the Hold Time may decrease the number of unsolicited
messages thereby increasing the available communication bandwidth.
Increasing the Hold Time may also increase the elapsed time between
unsolicited messages. This added delay might not be suitable for time
critical information.

Hold Count The Hold Count operates in conjunction with the Hold Time and Idle
Report Period to optimize unsolicited event reporting. This property
specifies the maximum number of events buffered for an unsolicited
response. An unsolicited message (containing all events to this point) is
sent whenever this threshold is reached. The valid range is 0 to 1000
with a default buffer setting of 10 events. A Hold Count of 0 or 1
effectively disables event buffering, an unsolicited response is sent
when an event occurs.
Increasing the Hold Count increases the event buffer which results in
fewer unsolicited responses. Decreasing the number of unsolicited
messages increases the available communication bandwidth.
Increasing the Hold Count may also increase the elapsed time between
unsolicited messages. This added delay might not be suitable for time
critical information.

Idle Report The Idle Report Period operates in conjunction with the Hold Time and
Period Hold Count to optimize the unsolicited event reporting. This property
specifies the maximum time permitted, in milliseconds, between events.
An unsolicited message (containing all events to this point) is sent
whenever a subsequent event is not received, after the last received
event, in this period of time. The valid range is 0 to 3600000

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 303

 milliseconds with a default setting of 10 milliseconds. An Idle Report
Period greater than the Hold Time effectively disables the feature. An
Idle Report Period of 0 will report events as quickly as possible.

Silent Master When enabled, this property will instruct the DAPserver™ to enable
unsolicited messages (the Class 1 Data, Class 2 Data and Class 3 Data
properties are ignored). Confirmations are not requested; the
DAPserver™ assumes all unsolicited messages are successful
received.
The Class 1 Data, Class 2 Data, and Class 3 Data properties are used
when the Silent Master feature is disabled. A confirmation is requested
for every unsolicited message sent.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-150
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements returned by the
DAPserver™.

Figure 3-150: DNP 3 Server Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Server Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Point Index This is the DNP 3 point index assigned to this analog input. DNP 3
responses to this point index use the contents and status of this analog
input.

Event Class This property assigns this analog input to an event class for DNP 3
class data polls. The valid settings are class 1, class 2, class 3, object
100, or disable (no class assignment). The default setting is class 2.

Size This property specifies the size, in bits, of this analog input. This analog
input can be defined as 16-bit or 32-bit.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 304

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the value stored in the
DAPserver™ database for transmission in the DNP 3 Server response.
The analog input scaling is defined in Equation 3-7.

Equation 3-7: DNP 3 Server Analog Input Scaling

The default setting is 0, which effectively disables the Offset.

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -1000000 to 1000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

Time Tag This property enables or disables the reporting of time-tagged

information with this analog input. When enabled, a time-tagged
variation is used to return the contents of this analog input. When
disabled, a non-time-tagged variation is used to return the contents of
this analog input.

Event This property specifies the threshold, which must be exceeded before
Deadband an analog input data change event is generated. This function
minimizes the number of unnecessary analog input data change events,
thereby improving system performance.

Units This property is used for the object 100 event class, the different
options are shown in the drop down menu are shown below in Figure
3-151.

Figure 3-151: Object 100 unit selection

Digital Input I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-152,
Window is used to specify the digital input values returned by the DAPserver™.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 305

 Figure 3-152: DNP 3 Server Digital Input I/O Parameters
There is one record in the DNP 3 Server Digital Input I/O Parameters
table for each digital input reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital input.

Description

Point Index This is the DNP 3 point index assigned to this digital input. DNP 3
responses to this point index use the contents and status of this digital
input.

Event Class This property assigns this digital input to an event class for DNP 3 class
data polls. The valid settings are class 1, class 2, class 3, or disable (no
class assignment). The default setting is class 1.

Auto. SOE Normally the DNP Server will use the time tag reported by the remote
device to report an SOE for this digital input. This property will instruct
the DNP Server to generate SOEs as follows:
• Disable – Do not generate SOEs.
• Enabled when open - Generate an SOE when this digital input
transitions from closed to open.
• Enabled when closed – Generate an SOE when this digital input
transitions from closed to open.
• Enable when changed – Generate an SOE whenever this digital
input changes state.

COS When enabled, for this digital input, this property will force the
transmission of a COS prior to sending the SOE. Online and offline
changes for this digital input are only reported as COS.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 306

SOE This property enables and disables the SOE reporting for this digital
input. When COS is disabled and SOE enabled, online and offline
changes of this digital input are reported as SOE.

Counter I/O Parameters

Property The Counter I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-153 is
Window used to specify the counter values returned by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-153: DNP 3 Server Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Server Counter I/O Parameters table
for each counter reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Point Index This is the DNP 3 point index assigned to this counter. DNP 3
responses to this point index use the contents and status of this
counter.

Event Class This property assigns this counter to an event class for DNP 3 class
data polls. The valid settings are class 1, class 2, class 3, or disable (no
class assignment). The default setting is “Disable”.

Size This property specifies the size, in bits, of this counter. This counter can
be defined as 16-bit or 32-bit.

Type This property specifies the counter contents reported: the running or
frozen value.

Event This property specifies the threshold, which must be exceeded before
Deadband an analog input data change event is generated. This function

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 307

 minimizes the number of unnecessary analog input data change events,
thereby improving system performance.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure
Window 3-154 is used to specify the DNP 3 analog output commands accepted
by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-154: DNP 3 Server Analog Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Server Analog Output I/O Parameters
table for each analog output command accepted by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog output.

Description

Point Index This is the DNP 3 point index assigned to this analog output. DNP 3
commands to this point index will modify the contents and status of this
analog output.

Size This property specifies the size, in bits, of this analog output. This
analog output can be defined as 16-bit or 32-bit.

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the received DNP 3 value prior
to setting the analog output value. The analog output scaling is defined
in Equation 3-8.
Database Value + Offset
DNP 3Value =
Divisor
Equation 3-8: DNP 3 Server Analog Output Scaling

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 308

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -1000000 to 1000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

Digital Output I/O Parameters

Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-155
Window is used to specify the DNP 3 digital output commands accepted by the
DAPserver™.

Figure 3-155: DNP 3 Server Digital Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the DNP 3 Server Digital Output I/O Parameters
table for each digital output command accepted by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital output.

Description

Point Index This is the DNP 3 point index assigned to this digital output. DNP 3
commands to this point index use the contents and status of this digital
output.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 309

Modbus
Server The Modbus Server returns information and accepts commands from a
higher order Modbus Client. The Modbus Server supports multiple
addressing and co-exists with other Modbus devices on a single
communication channel.

Modbus Host
Property One or more communication channel can be assigned to a Modbus
Window Server instance. A maximum of three alternate communication
channels can be assigned to a Modbus Server instance.
The Modbus Server Host Parameter table, shown in Figure 3-156, is
used to specify the communication channels.

Figure 3-156: Modbus Host

There is one record in the Modbus Server Host table for each
communication channel.

Host Name This property specifies a unique name to identify the communication
channel.

Control When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Operation disable the acceptance and processing of digital output commands on
Authorization this channel. This Modbus Server will accept digital output commands
when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and reject the
command when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Set When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Operation disable the acceptance and processing of analog output commands on
Authorization this channel. This Modbus Server will accept analog output commands
when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and reject the
command when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Time Sync. When a digital input is specified, the state will dynamically enable or
Authorization disable the acceptance and processing of time synchronization on this
channel. This Modbus Server will accept time synchronization
commands when the specified digital input is set (logical 1) and reject
the command when the digital input is cleared (logical 0).

Shared When this property is enabled, a common event buffer is used for the
Event Buffer primary and redundant communication channel. An event is reported
once, using the active communication channel. By default, the Shared

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 310

 Even Buffer is disabled.
When this property is disabled, each communication channel has an
independent event buffer. An event may be reported using each
communication channel.

Host This property specifies the pseudo digital input used to indicate the
Communica- communication status for this Modbus Server communication channel.
tion Status This property operates in conjunction with the following Off-line Timeout
property.

Off-line This property specifies the time, in seconds, the Modbus Server will
Timeout wait for a valid message before declaring this communication channel
failed. Communication is operational when the Modbus Server receives
a valid message during this period. The valid range is 0 (disable
function) to 3600 seconds with a default setting of 60 seconds.

Server This is the device address for this Modbus Server and must be in the
Address range 1 to 247.

Protocol Parameter
Property Selecting the Modbus Server “Protocol Parameter” option in the System
Window Management window accesses the protocol properties. The Modbus
Server Protocol Parameter property window is shown in Figure 3-157.

Figure 3-157: Modbus Server Protocol Parameters

Framing This property specifies the Modbus framing method: serial (RTU or
Method ASCII) or TCP/IP. The default is Modbus RTU, which is the most
commonly used serial implementation.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus Server returns 2 byte
for 2 Byte values. The order can be Most Significant Byte first (21) or Least
Data Significant Byte first (12). The default setting is the more commonly

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 311

 used Most Significant Byte first.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus Server returns 3 byte
for 3 Byte values. The default setting is the more commonly used Most Significant
Data Byte first.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus Server returns 4 byte
for 4 Byte values. The default setting is the more commonly used Most Significant
Data Byte first.

Byte Order This property specifies the byte order the Modbus Server returns
for Float floating point values. The default setting is the more commonly used
Data Most Significant Byte first.

Analog Input I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-158,
Window is used to specify the analog input measurements returned by the
DAPserver™.

Figure 3-158: Modbus Server Analog Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Server Analog Input I/O Parameters
table for each analog input reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Function This is the Modbus function code accepted by the Modbus Server to
Code report the contents of this analog input. The following function codes
are supported:

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 312

 • Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Address This property specifies the starting register address assigned to this
analog input. An analog input may span more than one register; one or
more analog inputs may share a single register. The range is 0 to
65535 for the two byte Modbus register address.

Start Byte This property specifies the starting byte of this analog input within the
starting register and is only applicable when two analog inputs share a
single register and there is more than one byte per register. The Start
Byte can be set to the first (1) or not used (0).

Data Length This property specifies the size of the returned analog input, in bytes.
The Start Byte and Data Length will be used to calculate how many
registers are required to report the Analog Input value.

Value Type This property indicates the data format the Modbus Server will use to
report the analog input value. The following analog input formats are
available:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Short floating point
• Binary Coded Decimal
• ASCII & BCD ASCII
• Modulo 1000 or 10000

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the value stored in the
DAPserver™ database for transmission in the Modbus Server
response. The analog input scaling is defined in Equation 3-9.
Database Value + Offset
Modbus Value =
Divisor
Equation 3-9: Modbus Server Analog Input Scaling
The default setting is 0, which effectively disables the Offset.

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -1000000 to 1000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 313

Digital Input I/O Parameters
Property The Digital Input I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-159,
Window is used to specify the digital input values returned by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-159: Modbus Server Digital Input I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Server Digital Input I/O Parameters
table for each digital input reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital input.

Description

Function This is the Modbus function code accepted by the Modbus Server to
Code report the contents of this digital input. The following function codes are
supported:
• Read output coil status (Modbus function code 1)
• Read input status (Modbus function code 2)
• Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Address This property specifies the register address assigned to this digital
input. The range is 0 to 65535 for the two byte Modbus register
address.

Bit Position This property, applicable for the Read Holding Register and Read Input
Register Function Codes, specifies the bit position of the digital input.
The least significant bit in a Modbus register is offset 0, while the most
significant bit is offset 31.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 314

Counter I/O Parameters
Property The Counter I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure 3-160, is
Window used to specify the counter values returned by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-160: Modbus Server Counter I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Server Counter I/O Parameters table
for each counter reported by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog input or counter.
Description

Function This is the Modbus function code accepted by the Modbus Server to
Code report the contents of this counter. The following function codes are
supported:
• Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Address This property specifies the starting register address assigned to this
counter. A counter may span more than one register; one or more
counters may share a single register. The range is 0 to 65535 for the
two byte Modbus register address.

Start Byte This property specifies the starting byte of this counter within in the
starting register and is only applicable when two counters share a single
register and there is more than one byte per register. The Start Byte
can be set to the first (1) or not used (0).

Data Length This property specifies the size of the returned counter, in bytes. The
Start Byte and Data Length will used to calculate how many registers
are required to report the Counter value.

Value Type This property indicates the data format the Modbus Server will use to

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 315

 report the counter value. The following counter formats are available:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Short floating point
• Binary Coded Decimal
• Modulo 1000 or 10000

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the counter stored in the
DAPserver™ database for transmission in the Modbus Server
response. The counter scaling is defined in Equation 3-10.
Database Value + Offset
Modbus Value =
Divisor
Equation 3-10: Modbus Server Counter Scaling
The default setting is 0, which effectively disables the Offset.

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -1000000 to 1000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

Analog Output I/O Parameters

Property The Analog Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure
Window 3-161, is used to specify the Modbus analog output commands
accepted by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-161: Modbus Server Analog Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Server Analog Output I/O
Parameters table for each analog output command accepted by the
DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 316

Point This is the point description of the mapped analog output.
Description

Function This is the Modbus function code accepted by the Modbus Server to
Code report the contents of this analog output. The following function codes
are supported:
• Read holding register (Modbus function code 3)
• Read input register (Modbus function code 4)

Address The Modbus address assigned to this analog output. The range is 0 to
65535 for the two byte Modbus register address.

Start Byte This property specifies the starting byte of this analog output within in
the starting register and is only applicable when two analog outputs
share a single register and there is more than one byte per register. The
Start Byte can be set to the first (1) or not used (0).

Data Length This property specifies the size of the returned analog output, in bytes.
The Start Byte and Data Length will used to calculate how many
registers are required to set the Analog Output value.

Value Type This property indicates the data format the Modbus Server will accept to
set the analog output value. The following analog input formats are
available:
• Signed or unsigned integer
• Short floating point
• Binary Coded Decimal
• Modulo 1000 or 10000

Offset The Offset and Divisor are used to scale the received Modbus value
prior to setting the analog output value. The analog output scaling is
defined in Equation 3-2.
Database Value + Offset
Modbus Value =
Divisor
Equation 3-21: Modbus Server Analog Output Scaling

Divisor Refer to the Offset section for a description of scaling. The Divisor
range is -1000000 to 1000000 with a default of 1, which effectively
disables the Divisor.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 317

Digital Output I/O Parameters
Property The Digital Output I/O Parameter definition table, shown in Figure
Window 3-162, is used to specify the Modbus digital output commands accepted
by the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-162: Modbus Server Digital Output I/O Parameters

There is one record in the Modbus Server Digital Output I/O Parameters
table for each digital output command accepted by the DAPserver™.

Reference The Reference Name represents a single string of data that combines
Name the bay name, group name, and name from the basic information tab.

Point This is the point description of the mapped digital output.

Description

Function This is the Modbus function code accepted by the Modbus Server to
Code operate this digital output. The following function code is supported:
• Coil Output (Modbus function code 5)
• Write Single Register (Modbus function code 6)
• Write Multiple Register (Modbus function code 16)

Address The Modbus address assigned to this digital output. The range is 0 to
65535 for the two byte Modbus register address.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 318

Monitor Applications
Basics

Overview This section describes the properties, which are common to all
communication protocols. The supported protocols are listed below.
• IEC® 60870-5-101
• IEC® 60870-5-103
• IEC® 60870-5-104
• DNP 3

Monitor Application Summary

Overview The Application Summary properties are accessed by selecting the
Monitor instance in the System Management window. A sample Monitor
Application Summary property window is shown in Figure 3-163.

Figure 3-163: Monitor Application Summary

Object Name This property specifies the name of this Monitor instance in the Real-
Time Database. Each Object Name is unique in the DAPserver™.

Com. The time interval, in seconds, to calculate ratio of frame error and frame
Statistic flow speed. Used to calculate communication channel health. The valid
Interval range is 60 to 600 seconds with a default setting of 60 seconds.

Threshold of The maximum number of communication errors, as a percentage,

Com. Error allowed before the DAPserver™ Monitor application sets the health of
the Monitor application to “Bad”.

Time Sync. The interval, in seconds, the DAPserver™ will time synchronize the
Period devices associated with the Monitor application. The valid range is 1 to
360000 seconds with a default of 60 seconds. Setting the period to -1
will disable the time synchronization of the devices. When the time

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 319

 period is set to 0 the DAPserver™ will only send a time synchronization
during initialization.

Device Point Properties

The Monitor Application Port Pseudo Point, Analog Input, Digital Input,
Basic Counter, Analog Output, Digital Output, and Event Point Basic
Information Information window and properties are similar to Client Applications.

Control The Monitor Application Port Analog Input, Digital Input, Analog Output,
and Digital Output Control window and properties are similar to Client
Applications.

The Monitor Application Digital Input and Event Point Alarm Setting
Alarm window and properties are similar to Client Applications.
Setting

The Monitor Application Port Pseudo Point, Analog Inputs, Digital

Value Inputs, Counters, Analog Outputs, Digital Outputs, and Events Points
Value window and properties are similar to Client Applications.

Monitor The IEC® 60870-5-101 Monitor enables the DAPserver™ to monitor

IEC® 60870-5-101 communication between devices. The DAPserver™
can log, in the real-time database, transferred information; for example,
measurements, breaker positions, and energy.

Protocol Parameter
Property The Monitor Application Protocol Parameter window and properties are
Window similar to the corresponding Client Applications.

Device Pseudo Points

The Monitor Application Device Pseudo Points, window and properties
are similar to the corresponding Client Applications.

Device Point I/O Parameters

Property The I/O Parameters definition table for each point type is used to
Window specify the measurements or states monitored by the DAPserver™.

There is one record in the Monitor I/O Parameters table for each point

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 320

 monitored by the DAPserver™ in the corresponding I/O Parameters
table.
The Monitor Application I/O Parameters window and properties are
similar to the corresponding Client Application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 321

Terminal Window
Overview The Terminal window provides a protocol monitor and analyzer feature,
which can be used to debug and diagnose communications between
IEDs and the DAPserver™. You can use the Toolbar to manage the
communication massages, switch monitor mode, or control the
communication process. Before invoking the Terminal window, you
must confirm the DAPstudio™ is communicating with the DAPserver™,
via an Ethernet channel.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 322

View Modes
Overview Terminal window provides two modes to browse the outputs of the
protocol analyzer: Window Mode and List Mode. The default view mode
is List Mode. Use the or button on the toolbar to
switch the current view mode.

Window Left-clicking the button on the toolbar will separate Terminal

Mode window into two sub windows. The left window displays the frame
stream, while the right window displays the protocol analysis of the
protocol frame, which you can left-click and highlight in the left sub
window.

List Mode Left clicking the button on the toolbar will instruct Terminal
window to display the current protocol frame and analyzer output in a
list table. Positioning the mouse on a frame, will display a window of
analyzer result. In List Mode, the analyzer result, of a frame, may not be
fully displayed in the window due to the size of the window.

Options
Overview The option commands can be accessed using the toolbar, shown in
Figure 3-164, which is displayed on the top of the Terminal window.

Figure 3-164: Terminal Window Toolbar

Open This option is used to find and open a previously saved protocol data
file, which includes the protocol frames and analyzer output. The
contents of the file are displayed using the Terminal window List Mode
or Window Mode. While the historical data is displayed, Terminal
window will not display real-time protocol information. Selecting the
option will resume the real-time protocol display.

By selecting the button, this will initiate the Open File Search
window, shown in Figure 3-165, enabling you to locate the protocol file
that was previously saved.
Protocol files will have the extension .frm

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 323

 Figure 3-165: Open File Search Window

Filter This option is used to set Filter parameters to control which messages
and/or protocol attributes are displayed in the Terminal window.
Protocol messages can be filtered by:
• Frame Type
o Transmitted Messages
o Received Messages
• Address
o When multiple devices are connected to the same
channel, you can select which device to monitor.
• Frame Subtype
o Data
o Read Variable
o Read Input
o Read Last Events
o Read Setting
o Adjust Data Time
o Adjust Time
o Read Output
• Port
o When multiple ports are defined for the channel, you can
select which port to monitor

For protocols, which are “layered protocols”, you can select which layer
to monitor; for example, this feature can be used with DNP 3. This

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 324

 would eliminate the data from other layers from being displayed.

By selecting the button, the Filter Option Menu, shown in Figure

3-166 will open and enabling you to select specifically which filters to
apply to the viewed protocol messages with the Terminal window.

Figure 3-166: Filter Option Menu

Search This option is used to search the current protocol information for a
specific message(s). The search function will provide the ability to
search for messages by Frame Type, Device Address, Frame Subtype,
Message Start Time, Message End Time, or for messages containing
specific characters.

By selecting the button, the Search Option Menu, shown in

Figure 3-167, will open and enabling you to select the options for the
search criteria. Once the desired options have been selected or
entered, left-click the button to initiate the search.

Note: The button will be inactive while real-time data is

displayed, the button will only be active when the display is set
to static or when viewing a previously saved file.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 325

 Figure 3-167: Search Option Menu

Save/Cancel This option is used to save the current protocol information as it is

displayed in the Terminal window. Terminal window saves to a file,
which is created in the Frame directory under the current project.
Terminal window will continue to save the protocol information until the
button is selected from the toolbar or when the configured Set
parameters have been met.

By selecting the button, this will invoke DAPStudio to save the

current displayed protocol information to a file within the Frame
directory of the current project folder. While DAPStudio is saving the
file, the button will temporarily change to be used for the
button.

Pause/Scroll This option is used to select between stopping the display as it scrolls
and resuming the real-time data display when it is stopped. The
displayed messages with in the Terminal window will remain paused
until the option is selected.

By selecting the button, the protocol messages within the

Terminal window will stop allowing you to examine the messages closer
and use the scroll bar on the side of the Terminal window to review
previous messages. The button will temporarily change to be
used for the button, which will resume the real-time display of
the protocol messages in the Terminal window.
Note: When the option to set the display to scroll after the displayed has
been stopped is selected; the messages will resume from the point in
time when the button has been selected and not from the time
when button was initially selected.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 326

Clear This option is used to clear the current protocol messages displayed in
the Terminal window. The option can be used while the display
is currently scrolling or while the display is paused. This function may
also be used while reviewing a previously saved protocol data file.

By selecting the button will clear all protocol data from the
Terminal window.

Set This option is used to set the options for saving the protocol data to a
file. The option will enable you to define the Start Time and End
Time for the duration that the file should be recorded and will provide
the advanced functions to save only specific protocol frames.

By selecting the button will open Save Frame Option window. In

this window, select the Start Time, End Time for saving the file, and if
desired, define the specific frames to save by selecting the
button and define the Target Frame, Before Character, After Character.
Figure 3-168 below shows the Save Frame Option window with the
Advance parameters. Once complete, select the “OK” button. The save
function will then be initiated based on the start time and end time
defined.

If the set function is not used, the file can be saved using the
option as previously mentioned.

Figure 3-168: Save Frame Option Window

Reset This option is used for resetting the Terminal window display in order to
resume operation to after a previously saved protocol data file has been
opened.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 327

 By selecting the button, while a previously saved protocol data
file is opened, will force the Terminal window to clear all data and then
resume normal operation.

Login This option is used for logging into the Terminal window in order to
initiate certain commands through the Command window.
The command functions that will require you to login with the proper
authorization are:
• Reset
• Boot
• Switch
• Lock
• Unlock
• Disable
• Enable
• DO
• AO

If you attempt to initiate one of the above functions without entering an

authorized user login and password, the message “Unauthorized” will
appear in the Command window.

By selecting the button will open the User Login window, shown
in Figure 3-169. Enter the appropriate Username and Password in the
respective input fields and then select the “OK” button. If authorized,
you can now initiate commands through the Command window that
require control authorization. An example of what the Command
window looks like is shown in Figure 3-170.

Figure 3-169: User Login Window

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 328

 Figure 3-170: Command Window

Window/List This option is used for changing views of the Terminal window to
Mode change the way that protocol data is displayed.

By default, when the Terminal window initially opens, the view is set to
List Mode. When the button is selected, the view will change
from List Mode to Window Mode. After the button has been
selected and the view has changed, this button changes to the
button, which enables you to change the view back to the List Mode
view. Examples of the List Mode and Window Mode are shown in
Figure 3-171, and Figure 3-172, respectively.

Figure 3-171: Terminal Window - List Mode View

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 329

 Figure 3-172: Terminal Window - Window View

Pre Page This option is used when a previously saved protocol data file is opened
to view the previous pages within the file. While the real-time protocol
data is displayed, this option is grayed out indicating that the option is
inactive.

When a previously saved protocol file is opened, selecting the

button to change to the previous page.

Next Page This option is used when a previously saved protocol data file is opened
to view the next page within the file. While the real-time protocol data is
displayed, this option is grayed out indicating that the option is inactive.

When a previously saved protocol file is opened, selecting the

button to change to the next page with in the file.

Filtering
Overview Advanced filtering is provided to allow you to focus on specific
information; for example, interactive procedure for building
communication. The filter conditions are Boolean AND relationship,
more than one can be enabled at any given time.

Protocol Layer
Overview The ISO OSI (International Standards Organization Open System
Interconnection) model specifies seven layers. The International

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 330

 Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) specifies a simplified model
consisting of the physical, data link and application layers. The Protocol
Layer Filter window, shown in Figure 3-173, allows you to monitor a
specific layer.

Figure 3-173: Terminal Window Protocol Layer Filter

Application The Application Layer sends and receives complete or original SCADA
Layer messages to and from a master station, submaster stations, outstations
or intelligent electronic devices (IEDs). This layer provides the
commonly required protocols. The Terminal window displays the
Application Layer interactive messages when this filter is active.

Transport The Transport Layer manages flow control including error checking.
Layer The Terminal window only displays the Transport Layer interactive
messages when this filter is active.

Data Link The Data Link Layer builds and maintains the data transmission link.
Layer While this layer is selected, the Terminal window only displays the Data
Link Layer interactive messages.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 331

Frame Type
This option filters by transmission direction; DAPStudio sorts all frames
to two elementary classes: Receive Data (RX) and Send Data (TX).
Selecting one of these options will instruct Terminal window to only
display this type of frames. The default status is all unselected (display
communication in both directions).

Figure 3-174: Terminal Window Frame Type Filter

Address
This filter is used to limit the analysis and display to a single IED. This
option is useful in a multi-drop scenario where several IEDs
communicate with DAPserver™ on a shared communication channel.
The IED is selected using the protocol device address; Terminal
window provides a list of the IEDs on the communication channel.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 332

 Figure 3-175: Terminal Window Address Filter

Frame SubType
For convenience to debug and diagnostic the communication, frames
are assorted to several subtypes according to the function and
application characteristics. Each communication protocol will have its
own frame sub-types. When the DAPserver™ receives the protocol
frames, the DAPserver™ will automatically computes that specific
communication protocol frame subtype.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 333

 Figure 3-176: Terminal Window Frame Subtype Filter

Port
Overview The DAPserver™ supports a maximum of 4 communication ports for
redundancy, and VPort binding to a runtime communication channel
object. This filter allows you to selectively monitor a port.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 334

 Figure 3-177: Terminal Window Port Filter

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 335

Command Window
Overview The Command window is an advanced facility used to control and
debug internal communication runtime objects. You can directly send
custom manual frames or output control from the DAPserver™.

Figure 3-178: Command Window

RESET
Overview The RESET command will force the Client application to send a close
command to all digital output points whose Command Type property
shown in the “Basic Information” tab of the target remote device is set to
“Reset” as shown in Figure 3-179.

Figure 3-179: Client Digital Output Basic Information

Along with forcing a close command to the digital outputs, the RESET
command will also force to a open state (or false) all digital input and
event points whose Auto Reset property within the “Basic Information”
tab of the target remote device is set to “Disable” as shown in Figure
3-180.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 336

 Figure 3-180: Client Digital Input Basic Information

Syntax: RESET ‘Remote Device Reference Name’

Parameter The ‘Remote Device Reference Name’ is the name of the remote Client
in an instance of the Client application. The name is defined by a string
starting with RD and followed by the serial number of that remote Client
in the instance of the particular Client application. See Figure 3-181.
You must be logged in with remote control authorization.

Example: By opening the Terminal window through the Client application for the
device named DemoABB. See Figure 3-181.

Figure 3-181: Client Remote Device Reference Name

RESET RD1 (this will reset the points associated with the ABB-
REX521)
By opening the Terminal window through the Client application for the
device named DemoAreva. See Figure 3-181.
RESET RD1 (this will reset the points associated with the AREVA-

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 337

 KCEG142)
RESET RD2 (this will reset the points associated with the AREVA-
P542)

BOOT
Overview The BOOT command will restart the target CPU. If the target CPU has
been configured with redundancy enabled, this command will also
restart the partner CPU.
The BOOT command can be issued in the Terminal window of a Client
Application, Server Application, and/or VPort Application.

Syntax: BOOT

Parameter: No parameter is required for the BOOT command but you must login
first with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command BOOT in the Command window, the CPU will
reboot. See Figure 3-182.

Figure 3-182: Command Window BOOT Function

SWITCH
Overview The SWITCH command will force the target CPU to switch between
active and standby if the target CPU has been configured for
redundancy (Figure 3-183) and the partner CPU is currently on-line
(Figure 3-184).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 338

 Figure 3-183: Redundant System

Figure 3-184: Redundant Partner CPU Status

The SWITCH command can be issued in the Terminal window of either
a Client Application, Server Application, and/or VPort Application

Syntax: SWITCH

Parameter: No parameter is required for the SWITCH command but you must login
first with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command SWITCH in the Command window, the active
CPU will become the standby and the partner CPU will become active.

DEBUG
Overview The DEBUG command will enable the debug functions of the target

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 339

 runtime object to start. Through this function, the protocol specific
communication traffic will be displayed in the Traffic window for both
transmitted and received messages from the CPU to the target runtime
object. See Figure 3-185.

Figure 3-185: Command Window Debug Function

The DEBUG command can be issued in the Terminal window of either
a Client Application, Server Application, and/or VPort Application

Syntax: DEBUG

Parameter: No parameter is required for the DEBUG command.

Example: By entering the command DEBUG in the Command window, the

protocol message traffic will be displayed in the Traffic window.
Once the messages are displayed, you can change views by toggling
the button labeled “Window/List Mode”. See Figure 3-186 & Figure
3-187.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 340

 Figure 3-186: List View

Figure 3-187: Window View

UNDEBUG
Overview The UNDEBUG command will disable the debug functions of the target
runtime object and stop the communication traffic in the window.
The UNDEBUG command can be issued in the Terminal window of
either a Client Application, Server Application, and/or VPort Application

Syntax: UNDEBUG

Parameter: No parameters are required for the UNDEBUG function.

Example: By entering the command UNDEBUG in the Command window, the

protocol message traffic will be stopped in the Traffic window. See

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 341

 Figure 3-188.

Figure 3-188: Command Window Undebug

LOCK
Overview The LOCK command will set the interlocking of the target object specific
point (AI, DI, AO, DO) to be blocked. Any command issued to the target
point will be blocked until the UNLOCK function is issued to the target
point or the interlocking PLC application unblocks the command.
The LOCK command can only be issued in the Terminal window of a
Client application instance.

Syntax: LOCK ‘Point Reference Name’

Parameter: The ‘Point Reference Name’ is the name of the point defined in the
target instance of the Client application.
The ‘Point Reference Name’ is defined in the following conventions:
‘Remote Device Reference Name’.’Point Type followed by Point
Serial Number’
Point Type is defined as:
• RAI – Analog Input point in the remote device
• RDI – Digital Input point in the remote device
• RAO – Analog Output point in the remote device
• RDO – Digital Output point in the remote device
• RCT – Counter point in the remote device

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 342

 • REV – Event point in the remote device

You must be logged in with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command LOCK RD1.RDO3 in the Command window

will block all remote control commands to the third digital output point of
the first remote device.

UNLOCK
Overview The UNLOCK command will clear the lock command on the interlocking
of the target object specific point (AI, DI, AO, DO) to be enabled. Any
command issued to the target point will be allowed until the LOCK
function is issued to the target point or the interlocking PLC application
blocks the command.
The UNLOCK command can only be issued in the Terminal window of a
Client application instance.

Syntax: UNLOCK ‘Point Reference Name’

Parameter: The ‘Point Reference Name’ is the name of the point defined in the
target instance of the Client application.
The ‘Point Reference Name’ is defined in the following conventions:
‘Remote Device Reference Name’.’Point Type followed by Point
Serial Number’
Point Type is defined as:
• RAI – Analog Input point in the remote device
• RDI – Digital Input point in the remote device
• RAO – Analog Output point in the remote device
• RDO – Digital Output point in the remote device
• RCT – Counter point in the remote device
• REV – Event point in the remote device

You must login with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command UNLOCK RD1.RDO3 in the Command

window will set the interlocking status of the third digital output point of
the first remote device to be cleared which means all commands to the
point will be allowed.

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 343

DISABLE
Overview The DISABLE command will disable communications between the
Client application and the targeting remote Client defined in the Client
application. The DISABLE command can only be issued in the Terminal
window of a Client application instance.

Syntax: DISABLE ‘Remote Device Reference Name’

Parameter: The ‘Remote Device Reference Name’ is the name of the remote Client
in an instance of Client application. This name is defined by a string
starting with RD and followed by the serial number of that remote Client
in the instance of Client application. For example, RD1 represents the
first remote Client in the Client application instance.
You must login with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command DISABLE RD1 in the Command window will
disable the communication between the Client application and the first
remote device of the specific Client application instance. If the
communication between a Client application and the remote device is
disabled, no polling will be sent to that remote device and any response
including an unsolicited response will be ignored by the Client
application. See Figure 3-189.

Figure 3-189: Client Application Disable Command

ENABLE
Overview The ENABLE command will enable communications between the Client
application and the targeting remote Client defined in this Client
application. The ENABLE command can only be issued in the Terminal
window of a Client application instance.

Syntax: ENABLE ‘Remote Device Reference Name’

Parameter: The ‘Remote Device Reference Name’ is the name of the remote Client
in an instance of Client application. This name is defined by a string

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 344

 starting with RD and followed by the serial number of that remote Client
in the instance of Client application. For example, RD1 represents the
first remote Client in the Client application instance.
You must login with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command ENABLE RD1 in the Command window will
enable the communication between the Client application and the first
remote device of the specific Client application instance. If the
communication between a Client application and the remote device has
been enabled, all polling will be sent to that remote device and any
response including all unsolicited responses will be accepted by the
Client application. See Figure 3-190.

Figure 3-190: Client Application Enable Command

DO
Overview The DO command will send a remote control command to the target AI,
DI or DO with a desired Trip/Close (Raise/Lower) value.
If the target point is a AI point, the command will then be redirected to
its associated Raise Control Point or Lower Control Point. If the target is
a DI point, the command will be redirected to its associated Open DO
Point or Close DO Point. If no points have been associated with the AI
or DI points, then no command will be sent and an error will be reported
back to the Terminal window.
The DO command can only be issued in the Terminal window of a
Client application instance.

Syntax: DO ‘Point Reference Name’ Control Value

Parameter: The ‘Point Reference Name’ is the name of the point defined in the
target instance of a specific Client application. The point reference
name is defined in the following convention: ‘Remote Device
Name’.’Point Type followed by Point Serial Number’

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 345

 Point Type is defined as:
• RAI – Analog Input point in the remote device
• RDI – Digital Input point in the remote device
• RAO – Analog Output point in the remote device
• RDO – Digital Output point in the remote device
• RCT – Counter point in the remote device
• REV – Event point in the remote device

Control Value is defined as:

• 0 – Trip/Open/Low
• 1 – Close/Raise

You must login with remote control authorization.

Example 1: By entering the command DO RD1.RD03 1 will force the Client

application to send a close command to the third digital output point of
the first remote device (See Figure 3-191).

Figure 3-191: DO Example 1

Example 2: By entering the command DO RD1.RAI1 0 will force the Client

application to send a trip command to the third digital output point of the
first remote device (See Figure 3-192).

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 346

 Figure 3-192: DO Example 2
By entering the command DO RD1.RAI1 1 will force the Client
application to send a close command to the third digital output point of
the first remote device (See Figure 3-192).

Example 3: By entering the command DO RD1.RDI1 0 will force the Client

application to send a trip command to the first digital output point of the
first remote device (See Figure 3-193).

Figure 3-193: DO Example 3

By entering the command DO RD1.RDI1 1 will force the Client
application to send a close command to the second digital output point
of the first remote device (See Figure 3-193).

AO
Overview The AO command will send a analog control command to the target
analog output with a desired analog value.
The AO command can only be issued in the Terminal window of a
Client application instance.

Syntax: AO ‘Point Reference Name’ Value

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 347

Parameter: The ‘Point Reference Name’ is the name of the point defined in the
target instance of a specific Client application. The point reference
name is defined in the following convention: ‘Remote Device
Name’.’Point Type followed by Point Serial Number’
Point Type is defined as:
• RAI – Analog Input point in the remote device
• RDI – Digital Input point in the remote device
• RAO – Analog Output point in the remote device
• RDO – Digital Output point in the remote device
• RCT – Counter point in the remote device
• REV – Event point in the remote device

Value is defined as:

Any analog value which is accepted by the remote device for the
target analog output.
You must login with remote control authorization.

Example: By entering the command AO RD1.RAO1 200 will force the Client
application to send a analog output command to the first analog output
point of the first remote device with a value of 200.

SHOW
Overview The SHOW command will list the value of the target type of either an
individual system point or a specified range of system points of the
target remote device.

Syntax: SHOW ‘Point Reference Type Name’ Start Number~End Number

Parameter: The ‘Point Reference Type Name’ is the name of the point defined in
the target instance of a specific Client application. The point reference
name is defined in the following convention: ‘Remote Device
Name’.’Point Type’
Point Type is defined as:
• RAI – Analog Input point in the remote device
• RDI – Digital Input point in the remote device
• RAO – Analog Output point in the remote device
• RDO – Digital Output point in the remote device
• RCT – Counter point in the remote device

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 348

 • REV – Event point in the remote device

Example: By entering the command SHOW RD1.RAO 1~10 will list the value of
the analog output values from point 1 to 10 in the first remote device.
See Figure 3-194.

Figure 3-194: AO Examp

ASAT Solutions Inc. DAP 5 Version 1.00 349

 Overview
IED templates are full function definitions including the communication
protocol and point mapping. You can directly add an IED template to an
existing Client Application. Figure 4-1 below shows the Device Library
window, which can be accessed by left clicking twice on the “Device
Library” icon from the DAPstudio™ Main window.

Figure 4-1: Device Library

DAPstudio™ stores the Device Library files in
“{installationdirectory}\system\EqpLib”, such as “C:\Program
Files\DAPStudio\system\EqpLib”. The extended name of Device Library
files is .pt, and the file name is constructed by Manufacturer
Name_Device Model_Protocol Name. A complete file name of Device
Library file is like ABB_RCS9612_IEC103.pt”.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 350

Creating an IED Template
Overview IED templates are created and added using the Device Library function,
or exported from a Client Application.

Using Device Library

Overview Creating and adding an IED template to the Device Library is a three-
step process; manufacturer, communication protocol and model.

Adding a The IED manufacturer must be defined before an IED template can be
Manufacturer created. If the manufacturer does not already exist, use the following
process to create the manufacturer.

Start the IED manufacturer creation by left clicking the button, which
is located at the top of the Device Library sub window. The Adding
Manufacturer Properties window, shown in Figure 4-2 is opened to
specify the IED template properties, which are used to define the
filename.

Figure 4-2: Adding Manufacturer Properties

Specify the IED manufacturer, model and select the communication
protocol, which the IED uses to communicate. Within the Point Type
Selection area, check the boxes of the data types supported by this
IED. Left-click the “OK” button to add the IED to the library.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 351

Adding a A communication protocol was defined when the manufacturer was
Protocol created. However, manufacturers may support multiple communication
protocols. Use the following procedure to add a communication protocol
and IED to an existing manufacturer.
Right-click on the manufacturer and select the “New Device” option
from the popup menu, which is shown in Figure 4-3 below.

Figure 4-3: New Protocol

The Adding Protocol Properties window, shown in Figure 4-4 will open
to specify the IED template properties, which are used to define the
filename.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 352

 Figure 4-4: Adding Protocol Properties
Specify the model, communication protocol and data types supported
by this IED; left-click the “OK” button to add the IED to the library.

Adding a IEDs are defined during the manufacturer and communication protocol
Model definition. Use the following process to add additional IED template
models to existing manufacturers and communication protocols.
Locate the manufacturer and position the cursor over the
communication protocol. Right-click on the protocol and select the “New
Device” option from the popup menu, which is shown in Figure 4-5.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 353

 Figure 4-5: New Model

The Adding Model Properties window, shown in Figure 4-6 is opened to

specify the IED template properties, which are used to define the
filename. The manufacturer and communication protocol are inherited.

Figure 4-6: Adding Model Properties

Specify the model and data types supported by this IED; left-click the
“OK” button to add the IED to the library.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 354

Exporting From a Client Application
Exporting IED interfaces are frequently developed and verified from within a Client
From a Application. Exporting these IED definitions to the library, simplifies
Client reusability within the same project, over multiple projects, for multiple
Application users. Any IED interface created within a Client Application can be
exported to the Device Library using the following process.
Open the Client Application and position the cursor on the model whose
definition will be exported. Right-click and select “Save to Device
Library” from the popup menu, which is shown in Figure 4-7 below.

Figure 4-7: Save To Device Library

The Exporting IED Properties window, shown in Figure 4-8 will open to
specify the manufacturer, model and communication protocol
properties, which are used to define the filename. The default settings
are loaded from the Client Application settings.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 355

 Figure 4-8: Exporting IED Properties
Left-click the “OK” button to add the IED to the library.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 356

Modifying an IED Template
Overview In the Device Library, IED templates can be modified, which includes
changing the basic properties, points, and removing existing IED
templates.

Modifying Right-click on the IED model, and select the “Edit Point” option in the
Points popup menu, shown in Figure 4-9 below.

Figure 4-9: Edit Point

The Point Editor window, shown in Figure 4-10 will appear. In the Point
Editor window, you will have access to all the IED points, which you can
modify.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 357

 Figure 4-10: Point Editor

Modifying IED templates can be modified from the library. Right-click on the IED
IED model, and select the “Properties” option in the popup menu, shown in
Properties Figure 4-11 below.

Figure 4-11: Properties

The Modify IED Properties window, shown in Figure 4-12 permits the
modification of the IED model name, plus the addition and/or deletion of
data types.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 358

 Figure 4-12: Modify IED Properties
Left-click the “OK” button to apply the changes.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 359

Removing IED Template(s)
Overview IED templates can be removed from the library individually, by
manufacturer, or by a communication protocol within a manufacturer.

Removing a Use the following process to remove an individual IED template from
Single IED the library.

Right-click the on IED model name and select “Delete” from the popup
menu, shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13: Delete Single IED

A confirmation message, shown in Figure 4-14 is displayed with the IED
manufacturer, model and communication protocol to reaffirm the
deletion.

Figure 4-14: Delete IED Message

Left-click the “Yes” button to delete the selected IED template from the
library. Otherwise, left-click the “No” button or the “Cancel” button to
leave the IED template in the library.

Removing a Use the following process to remove all of the manufacturer IED
Protocol templates using the same communication protocols.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 360

 Under each manufacture the IED templates are grouped by
communication protocol. Position the cursor over the manufacturer
communication protocol to be removed. Right-click and select the
“Delete” option from the popup menu, shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15: Delete IEDs By Protocol

A confirmation message, shown in Figure 4-16 is displayed with the IED
manufacturer and communication protocol to reaffirm the deletion.

Figure 4-16: Delete IEDs by Protocol Message

Left-click the “Yes” button to delete the manufacturer communication
protocol and all of the associated IED templates, from the Device
Library. Otherwise, left-click the “No” button or the “Cancel” button to
leave the template within the library.

Removing a Use the following process to remove all of the IED templates
Manufacturer associated with a manufacturer.

The IED templates are grouped by manufacturer. Position the cursor

over the manufacturer to be removed. Right-click and select the
“Delete” option from the popup menu shown in Figure 4-17 below

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 361

 Figure 4-17: Delete Manufacturer
A confirmation message, shown in Figure 4-18 is displayed with the IED
manufacturers to reaffirm the deletion.

Figure 4-18: Delete Manufacturer Message

Left-click the “Yes” button to delete the manufacturer and all of the
associated IED templates, from the Device Library. Otherwise, left-click
the “No” button or the “Cancel” button to leave the template within the
library.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 362

Using IED Templates in Client Applications
Overview IED templates can be loaded from the Device Library into a Client
Application.

Loading into An IED template can be loaded into a Client Application from within the
a Client Device Library function. Start the Device Library function, right-click the
IED model select the “Add to Client Application” option in the popup
menu, shown in Figure 4-19

Figure 4-19: Add to Client Application

DAPstudio™ will check the Client Applications for an existing Client
Application using the specified communication protocol. A warning
message, shown in Figure 4-20 is displayed if this relationship does not
exist.

Figure 4-20: Create New Client Application

Left-click the “OK” button to start a guide to create a new Client
Application, or left-click the “Cancel” button to return.
The process differs when DAPstudio™ locates an existing Client using
the IED communication protocol. DAPstudio™ allows the option of
using one of the existing Clients or the creation of a new Client.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 363

 Figure 4-21: Add Device
On the Add Device message, shown in Figure 4-21, left-click the “Yes”
button to start a guide to create a new Client Application. Left-click the
“No” button will add the IED template into an existing Client Application.
DAPstudio™ will display the Port Select window, shown in Figure 4-22,
containing the available Client Applications.

Figure 4-22: Port Select

Select the Client Application and left-click the “Next” button to finish the
Client Application selection.
DAPstudio™ will prompt for the IED communication protocol address in
the Define Device Information window, shown in Figure 4-23. Enter the
IED address in the Device Address input field and left-click the “Next”
button.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 364

 Figure 4-23: Define Device Information
DAPstudio™ will open the Point Select window, shown in Figure 4-24,
that permits the enabling and disabling of individual point within the
Library definition.

Figure 4-24: Point Select

Right-click on any I/O point and left-click the “Select All” option to assign
all of the library points. Individual points are selected or deselected by
left clicking on the selection box.
Left-click the “Finish” button and the IED will be added to the Client

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 365

 Application.

Importing in An existing IED can be loaded with the library definitions from a Client
a Client Application. Start the Client Application function and right-click on the
IED to load and select the “Properties” option in the popup menu,
shown in Figure 4-25 below.

Figure 4-25: Importing Client

The IED Import Device Property window, shown in Figure 4-26 is used
to specify the IED. Use the pull-down menus to select the manufacturer
and model to load from the Device Library.

Figure 4-26: IED Import Device Property

Left-click the “OK” button to confirm the selection. Loading from the
Device Library will erase the current IED setting; therefore, confirmation
is required. On the IED Import Confirmation message, shown in Figure
4-27, left-click the “Yes” button.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 366

 Figure 4-27: IED Import Confirmation

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 367

 Introduction
Virtual Port (hereafter called VPort) is a port router function provided by
the DAPserver™. This feature provides the ability to connect a local
personal computer serial port to a serial device through TCP/IP.

Every VPort added and configured in DAPstudio™ should also be

configured on the PC that is going to be using the VPort through the
VPort Client Config application.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 368

DAPStudio Setup

Creating a New VPort Channel

The instructions explain the process to define a new VPort connection.

1. Access the VPort Application from the Main DAPstudio™ window

shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1: Main DAPstudio™

2. Right-click on “Network Port Mapping” option, and select the
“New…” menu option, which is shown in Figure 5-2

Figure 5-2: Network Port Mapping

3. Configure the parameters or properties of new Virtual Port in New

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 369

 Network Port window shown in Figure 5-3 (for more information see
Network Port on pg. 387).

Figure 5-3: New Network Port

4. Left-click on the “OK” button to create the new VPort channel.

Deleting a VPort Channel

To delete a VPort channel, right-click on the VPort object name, and
select the “Delete” option.

Figure 5-4: Vport Delete

DAPstudio™ will prompt for confirmation, shown in Figure 5-5, before
deleting the VPort channel. Select the “Yes” button to delete the VPort;
select the “No” will cancel the process.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 370

 Figure 5-5: VPort Delete Confirmation

Application Summary
Property Left clicking on “Network Port Mapping” in the System Management
Window window accesses the Application Summary properties. A sample VPort
Application window is shown Figure 5-6.

Figure 5-6: VPort Application

Name This property specifies the name of this VPort instance in the Real-Time
Database. Each Name is unique in the DAPserver™.

Network Port
Property The Network Port Configuration window, shown in Figure 5-7 is used to
Window create VPort connections. You can modify the properties, and download
to the DAPserver™ to apply the new configuration.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 371

 Figure 5-7: Network Port Configuration

Port Name The identifier of the current VPort object entered when creating the
VPort connection and can be modified anytime.

Serial Name This property specifies the physical DAPserver™ serial port used for
this VPort connection.

IP Address This property specifies the IP address, used in conjunction with the Port
Number; the remote computer can access the appointed VPort channel.
The Address is the network port IP of DAPserver™ Devices. IP address
should be subject to IPV4, such as “192.168.1.189”.

Port Number This property specifies the network connection’s port number, which
used with the IP Address to specify the VPort connection. Port number
can be any integer, but must be less than 65535.

Network The time in millisecond before confirming timeout for the Virtual Port
Timeout communication. The valid range is 0 to 60000 milliseconds with a
default setting of 2000 milliseconds.

Working This property specifies the VPort connection mode. Table 5-1 defines
Mode the four different types of VPort mode available. The default working
mode is set to “Virtual COM”.
Table 5-1: VPort Working Mode
Working Mode Definition
Virtual COM The Virtual COM mode is used when the

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 372

 Working Mode Definition
VPort device’s software does not have its
own VPort redirector and the VPort driver
is required to be installed on your personal
computer. The IP address and the Port
number for the VPort define a local TCP
Server listen port.
TCP Server The TCP Server mode is used when the
VPort device’s software does have its own
VPort redirector and the VPort driver does
not need to be installed on your personal
computer. The IP address and the Port
number for the VPort define a local TCP
Server listen port.
TCP Client The TCP Client mode is used when the
current DAPserver™ is connected to
another remote TCP Server port; for
example, another DAPserver™ with TCP
Server VPort mode. The TCP Client will
try to connect to TCP Server port every
one second. In TCP Client mode, the
Network Timeout parameter does not
have an effect.
UDP The UDP mode is similar to TCP Server
mode but UDP is used instead of TCP.
The IP address is set to a broadcast
address and the Port numbers define the
send and receive port of UDP. In UDP
mode, the Network Timeout parameter
does not have an effect.

Baud Rate The speed of data being transferred between the Client and the
DAPserver™. The minimum baud rate is 75 and the maximum is 256
000. The default value for Baud Rate is 9600.

Data Bits Data Bits is the number of bits used in the data being transferred
between the Client and the DAPserver™. The minimum number of Data
Bits is 5, and the maximum number of Data Bits is 8. The default value
of Data Bits is 8.

Parity Parity is the type of parity checking used for the communication
between the Client and the DAPserver™. The different types are:
“Odd”, “Even”, “Mark”, and “Space”. You may select “No” to disable the
parity check. Odd parity checking sets the parity bit so that there are
odd number of 1’s among the data bits and parity bit. Even parity

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 373

 checking sets the parity bit so that there are even number of 1’s among
the data bits and parity bit. Mark parity checking permanently sets the
parity bit to 1. Lastly, Space parity checking permanently sets the parity
bit to 0. The default setting for the Parity property is “No”.

Stop Bits The number of stop bits used in the communication between the Client
and the DAPserver™. Values available for the Stop Bits property are 1,
1.5 and 2. The default value is set at 1.

Flow Control The type of flow control for the communication between the device and
the DAPserver™. Setting the Flow Control property to “No” will disable
flow control. Available settings for Flow Control are “XON/XOFF” and
“Hardware”. For XON/XOFF flow control, two specific characters are
assigned to XON and XOFF. When the Receiver sends the XOFF
character during communication, the Transmitter will stop sending data,
and will only resume transmission when the Receiver sends the XON
character. Hardware flow control uses the dedicated signal wires such
as RTS/CTS or DTR/DSR to control the data flow. The default setting
for the Flow Control is “No”.

Modem The type of working mode for the modem that is supported by this
Support VPort. The available options are: None, Single Modem and Modem
Bridge.

Modem The AT command that is used to initialize the modem.

Initialize AT
Command

Phone The phone number to dial out for the modem connection. This property
Number is only applicable to the modem working in the client mode.

AT The time, in seconds, to wait for the AT command’s response.

Command
Timeout

Modem Idle The maximum idle period, in seconds, after which the modem hangs
Hangup up, when it is working in the event driven mode.

Buffer for The size of the buffer, in bytes, to save the traffic received from the
Modem VPort client side on the serial port, to be sent from the server side
Bridge connected to the modem.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 374

PC Setup

Modifying VPort Redirector

The Virtual Port redirector configuration can be modified at any time.
Locate the “VPort Client Config” option from your Start menu, which is
shown in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8: ASAT Virtual Port Config Tool

The ASAT Virtual Port Configuration Tool window, shown in Figure 5-9
will display the current virtual port settings. Highlight the virtual port to
be reconfigured and left-click on the Edit button.

The Com to TCP Mapping window, similar to the one in Figure 5-10:
Com to TCP Mapping window, will open. Enter the new settings, and
select the Ok button to save the changes. Left-click on the Update
VPort button to update the VPort with the changed information.

Note that it is possible to add a new VPort configuration by selecting the

add button. Left-clicking on the Delete button will result in the
highlighted VPort configuration(s) to be deleted, while choosing the
Remove VPort option deletes all the configured VPorts.

Left-click the “Exit” button when you have finished the virtual port
reconfiguration.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 375

 Figure 5-9: VPort Redirector Editor

Figure 5-10: Com to TCP Mapping window

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 376

Script Language
Introduction DAPstudio™ provides a means for writing customized logic that will run
on a DAPserver™. The syntax of the scripting language resembles a
cross between the C and BASIC languages thus making it easy to
implement scripts for those familiar with either language.
There are three areas in which scripts may be written:
User scripts using Logic Application under the “Logic Application” icon.
Digital output lockout management on a point-by-point basis.
Timed digital outputs using Batch Control under in the Logic Application
window.

This section will discuss each of the three areas/methods in order.

Coding technique is beyond the scope of this document. It is

assumed that the reader has some knowledge of programming
technique as well as a fundamental knowledge of either the C
or Basic programming languages.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 377

Point Naming Conventions
Introduction In order to use system points in expressions, it is necessary to have an
understanding of the naming conventions used in the DAPserver™.
Note that when inserting points into expressions using the Insert RTDB
Point utility, points can be found by looking for the point description
initially given to the point. However, when the point is placed in the
expression, the point will follow the conventions described below and
will not contain the assigned point description.
Reference names are assigned to all points within the run-time
database (RTDB). These names are automatically generated by
DAPstudio™, and are used by the scripting language to reference
RTDB points. These reference points can be typed in manually or can
be picked from the database list by clicking on the “Insert RTDB Point”
button pictured in Figure 6-1: The Insert RTDB Point button in the script
editor window below. It is recommended that the latter method is used,
primarily to avoid making errors when referencing points.

Figure 6-1: The Insert RTDB Point button in the script editor
window
Reference names are structured in three parts separated by a period as
follows:
‘Runtime object reference name’.’Sub runtime object name’.’Point Type and
number’

Runtime There are four prefixes used to identify runtime objects outlined in the
object following table.
reference
name

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 378

 Table 6-1: Runtime Object Prefixes
LINK Data communication channels are prefaced with LINK.
For example, LINK1 would be the first communication
link in a system. There can be a maximum of 75 links
in a system.
CTL Runtime objects associated with scripts themselves are
prefaced with CTL. DAPstudio™ will assign number in
the range of 77 to 122 for these objects.
VPORT More than one virtual connection can be active in a
DAPserver™ at any given time. VPORT is used to
prefix the object.
DAP™ A DAP™ object is an instance of the DAPserver™
firmware. Only one instance can be running in a
DAPserver™ at a time. DAP™ is reserved for it.

Sub runtime Sub runtime objects are prefaced with “RD” and reserved for system
object name use according to the object type. Ranges are summarized below. Note
that this summary is for information only. All numbers are assigned
automatically with no interaction from the user.
DAP™ Objects:
RD1 is reserved for the sub runtime object which represents the
device DAP™ properties.
RD3 to RD10 are reserved for the system communication ports.
RD11 to RD17 are reserved for the system protocols.
RD18 to RD127 are reserved for communication protocols.
Client and Monitor Objects:
RD1 to RD124 are reserved for remote devices
RD126 is reserved for the protocol object
RD125 and RD127 are reserved for communication port objects
Server Objects:
RD1 to RD122 are reserved to indicate remote hosts
RD113 to RD121 and RD126 are reserved to indicate remote hosts
RD123, RD124, RD125 and RD127 are reserved to indicate
communication port objects
Batch control and Lock:
RD1 to RD127 are reserved to indicate different control and interlock
objects
VPort:

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 379

 RD1 to RD127 are reserved to indicate different port mapping

Point Type Finally, point types are indicated by the prefixes in the table below
and number followed immediately by the point number; for example, RAI9
represents remote analog input #9.

Table 6-2: Point Types

PSD Indicates a pseudo point
RAI Indicates an analog input (AI) point from a remote
device
RDI Indicates a digital input (DI) point from a remote device
RAO Indicates an analog output (AO) point from a remote
device
RCT Indicates a counter from a remote device
RDO Indicates an digital output (DO) point from a remote
device
REV Indicates an event point from a remote device
PRP Indicates a property point

The range for all of the point types is from 1 to 16383.

Examples With knowledge of the above naming convention, it is now possible to

understand what the system is referring to. Following are a few
examples of the point names assigned to points by the DAPserver™:
• DAP.PSD1 would be the first pseudo point of the DAPserver™

• LINK1.PSD3 would be the third pseudo point on the first

communication link
• LINK3.RD1.RAI4 would be the forth analog input point on the
first device of the third communication link

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 380

Script Language Syntax
Introduction The script language syntax is summarized in this section.

Temporary Temporary variable identifiers are used as place holders in expressions.

Variable They are used to hold intermediate calculations and to return calculated
Identifiers values. In addition, temporary variables are used in three specific ways
within the DAPstudio™ scripting language:
When working with control lockout or Batch Control, a returned discrete
variable of 1 will prevent the specified control from operating. A
value of 0 will allow control execution.
When working with Logic Application where conditions control whether
or not a script runs, a returned discrete value of 1 will allow the script
to run. A returned value of 0 will prevent the script from running.

There are four types of temporary variables as outlined Table 6-3.

Table 6-3: Temporary Variable Identifiers

Variable Description
Type
DISCRETE A digital variable that represents a value of 0 or 1 only
MESSAGE An ASCII string of up to 256 characters.
INTEGER A four byte signed number that can range from
-2147483648 to +2147483647
FLOAT A short floating point number that ranges from
-3.40282344638 to +3.40282344638

Arithmetic Operators
Overview Table 6-4 summarizes the arithmetic operators provided by the Script
Language.

Table 6-4: Arithmetic Operators

Symbol Description
+ Addition

- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 381

 Symbol Description
% Modulo (calculate remainder in a division operation)
= Assign a value

Logic Operators
Overview Logic operators are based on Boolean Algebra, which is a method to
use algebraic techniques to expressions. Boolean Algebra is named
after George Boole and uses two possible values: true or false. True
equates to a value of 1, while false equates to 0. Table 6-5 summarizes
the Logic Operators provided by the Script Language.

Table 6-5: Logic Operators

Symbol Description
AND Logical AND
OR Logical OR
NOT Logical NOT

Comparison Operators
Overview Comparison operators are used to compare two expressions, with the
result evaluating to True or False. Table6-6 summarizes the
Comparison Operators supported by the DAPserver™ Programmable
Logic function.

Table6-6: Comparison Operators

Symbol Description
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to
< Less than
<= Less than or equal to
== Equal to (two adjacent equal signs)
<> Not equal to (less than sign follow by a greater than
sign)

Bit Operators
Overview Bitwise operators are used to manipulate individual bits. Unlike the
Logic Operators, the Bit Operators treat the operands as a vector of bits
rather than a single number. Table 6-7 summarizes the Bit Operators
supported by the DAPserver™ Programmable Logic function.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 382

 Table 6-7: Bit Operators
Symbol Description
| Bit OR
& Bit AND
~ Bit invert
<< Shift left
>> Shift right

Bitwise OR Figure 6-2 shows the Script Logic to bitwise OR two database analog
inputs and return the result.

Figure 6-2: Bitwise OR Logic

The top row of Figure 6-3 shows the original least significant 16 bits of
the first analog input database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI1. The middle row
shows the original least significant 16 bits of the second analog input
database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI2. The bottom row shows the result,
stored in the integer variable iResult, of the Bitwise OR operation on the
two analog inputs.

Figure 6-3: Bitwise OR

Bitwise AND Figure 6-4 shows the Script Logic to bitwise AND two database analog

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 383

 inputs and return the result.

Figure 6-4: Bitwise AND Logic

The top row of Figure 6-5 shows the original least significant 16 bits of
the first analog input database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI1. The middle row
shows the original least significant 16 bits of the second analog input
database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI2. The bottom row shows the result,
stored in the integer variable iResult, of the Bitwise AND operation on
the two analog inputs.

Figure 6-5: Bitwise And

Bitwise Figure 6-6 shows the Script Logic to invert a database analog input and
Invert return the result.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 384

 Figure 6-6: Bitwise Invert
The top row of Figure 6-7 shows the original least significant 16 bits of
the analog input database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI1. The bottom row
shows the result, stored in the integer variable iResult, after the original
number has been inverted.

Figure 6-7: Bit Inversion

Shift Left The Bitwise Shift Left operator can be used to shift the contents of a
number, several bit positions. For a three bit left shift operation the
three most significant bits are discarded while the three least significant
bits are set to zero. Figure 6-8 shows the Script logic to shift a database
analog input 3 bits left and return the result of the shift operation.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 385

 Figure 6-8: Shift Left Logic
The top row of Figure 6-9 shows the original least significant 16 bits of
the analog input database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI1. The bottom row
shows the result, stored in the integer variable iResult, after the original
number is shifted left 3 bit positions.

Figure 6-9: Three Bit Shift Left

Shift Right The Bitwise Shift Right operator can be used to shift the contents, of a
number, several bit positions). For a three bit right shift operation the
three least significant bits are discarded while the three most significant
bits are set to zero. Figure 6-10 shows the Script logic to shift a
database analog input 3 bits right and return the result of the shift
operation.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 386

 Figure 6-10: Shift Right Logic
The top row of Figure 6-11 shows the original least significant 16 bits of
the analog input database point, LINK1.RD1.RAI1. The bottom row
shows the result, stored in the integer variable iResult, after the original
number is shifted right 3 bit positions.

Figure 6-11: Three Bit Shift Right

Mathematical Functions
Overview Table 6-8 summarizes the mathematical functions supported by the
Script Language.

Table 6-8: Mathematical Functions

Function Description
integer labs(integer x); Calculate the absolute value of an integer.
float fabs(float x); Calculate the absolute value of a floating
point argument.
float asin(float x); Calculate the arcsine of the argument.
float acos(float x); Calculate the arccosine of the argument.
float atan(float x); Calculate the arctangent of the argument.
float atan2(float y, float Calculate the arctangent of y/x.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 387

 Function Description
x);
float sin(float x); Calculate the sine of the argument.
float cos(float x); Calculate the cosine of the argument.
float tan(float x); Calculate the tangent of the argument
float sinh(float x); Calculate the hyperbolic sine of the argument.
float cosh(float x); Calculate the hyperbolic cosine of the
argument.
float tanh(float x); Calculate the hyperbolic tangent of the
argument.
float floor(float x); Calculate the largest integer less than or
equal to the argument.
float fmod(float x, float Calculate the floating point remainder of x/y.
y);
float pow(float x, float Calculate x raised to the power of y.
y);
float sqrt(float x); Calculate the square root of the argument.
float exp(float x); Calculate the exponential of the argument.
float log(float x); Calculate the natural logarithm of the
argument.
float log10(float x); Calculate the base 10 logarithm of the
argument.
long atol(const char Converts a string representing an integer to a
*nptr); long integer.
double atof(const char Converts a string pointed to by nptr to a
*nptr); double-precision number.
integer Rand(); Generates a random integer value.
uint NOR(uint x, uint Evaluate the expression (x + y)’
y);
discrete XOR(discrete Return 1 if x = 1, y = 0, or x = 0, y = 1.
x, discrete y); Otherwise, returns 0.
double HEX(const char Convert a string pointed to by nptr to a
*nptr); hexadecimal value. The string must begin
with 0x follow by 1 or more X. X is a valid
Hexadecimal number (0 – F).

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 388

System Functions
Overview Table 6-9 summarizes the system functions supported by the Script
Language.

Table 6-9: System Functions

Function Description
DISCRETE Output(“point Send command to the target digital
reference name”, output output or analog output point with a
value, timeout); specific output value. Note that the point
reference name must be in parenthesis.
DISCRETE Wait until the target point has changed.
WaitRSChange(“point Note that the point reference name must
reference name”, target be in parenthesis.
value, timeout);
DISCRETE Sleep(timeout); Suspend running of the script for the
specified number of milliseconds
DISCRETE Returns the condition (online/offline) of
isTagOnLine(“point the referenced RTDB point
reference name”);

Conditional IF <condition(s)> THEN

Expressions <statement(s)>;
ELSE
<statement(s)>;
ENDIF;
SWITCH <variable>
CASE <constant>:
<statement(s)>;
BREAK;

CASE <constant>:
<statement(s)>;
BREAK;

DEFAULT:
<statement(s)>;
BREAK;
ENDSWITCH;

Loops FOR <variable> TO <condition> STEP <constant>

<statement(s)>;
NEXT;
WHILE <condition>

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 389

 <statement(s)>;
ENDWHILE;

General White spaces in scripts are ignored.

Notes
Comments are prefaced with “REM” as in the Basic language.
The “BREAK” statement can be used to exit loops.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 390

Logic Application
Starting the In a DAPstudio™ project, left-click twice on the “Logic Application” icon
Logic as shown in Figure 6-12 to gain access to the Logic Application and
Application Batch Control scripting functions.

Figure 6-12: DAPstudio™ Main Window

The window shown in Figure 6-13 will then appear.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 391

 Figure 6-13: Batch Control, Logic Application Startup Window

Adding a The window pictured in Figure 6-13 does not have any scripts
New Script associated with either the Batch Control or Logic Application methods.
To add a Logic Application script, right click on “Logic Application” and
select the “New” option.
The window shown in Figure 6-14 will then appear.

Figure 6-14: New Script Window

Enter the desired name of the script in the Name input field and left-
click the “OK” button to create the new script. The script name will then
appear under the method chosen. In this example, Logic Application
was chosen so that is where the script named “Script PLC 80” should
appear. This is shown in Figure 6-15.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 392

 Figure 6-15: New Script, “Script PLC 80”, Added

Script Editor To edit the script, left click on the script name. The Script Editing
window will then open as shown in Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16: Script Editing Screen for “Logic Application”

Note that this is the Script Editing screen for the Logic Application
method of writing scripts. Batch Control and the other methods of script
editing will be discussed later in this section.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 393

 The Logic Application method is meant to be a general programming
tool for scripts. Any point in the run-time database can be read or
manipulated without the need for returning variable values.
The basic rules for this type of script are:
Identical variable names can be used in different scripts.
System functions can be called from Logic Application scripts.
No variables are returned from Logic Application scripts.

In Logic Application, PLC expressions can be written to alter the value

of points under conditions dictated by the author of the script. The
expressions can be triggered by four different methods:
Periodically: The script will run continuously each time the configurable
Run Period timer expires.
On Condition: The script author can specify a system condition that will
trigger execution of the script.
On SOE/COS Received: The script will be triggered by the system on
receipt of a specified Sequence of Event (SOE) point or Change of
State (COS).
At Startup: The script will run only once when the system first starts up
(after the configurable Start Delay timer expires). This is useful for
one-time initializations when the system first starts up.

The trigger method is selected from the drop down menu labeled Run
Method as seen in Figure 6-.
With each of the trigger options, the first time the script runs can be
delayed by configuring the Start Delay parameter.

Entering Expressions should be entered with the aid of the Script Edit window.
Script Code To enter the Script Edit window, left click on the “Script Edit” button as
pictured in Figure 6-16. The window shown in Figure 6-17 will appear.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 394

 Figure 6-17: Script Edit Window
All of the operations available in the DAPstudio™ scripting language
are shown at the bottom of the Script Edit window. Clicking on any of
the buttons will result in that function or operator being inserted into the
script.
The Script Editor is available wherever scripts can be written in
DAPstudio™.
After script code has been entered, left-click the “Syntax Check” button
in the Script Edit window. This will check for any errors in the script.
Any errors found will be flagged. Figure 6-18 shows a script with an
error in an IF THEN ELSE statement while Figure 6-19 shows the same
corrected script after running Syntax Check.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 395

 Figure 6-18: Script with a Syntax Error

Figure 6-19: Script with Syntax Error Fixed

After left-clicking the “OK” button to accept the script, always
switch back to the DAPstudio™ Main window by clicking the

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 396

 button. DAPstudio™ will then warn you that a script object with name
name_of_script has been modified, left-click “Yes” to save the new
script as part of the project.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 397

Programmable Logic Application Examples
Overview The following screen captures show examples of scripts written in the
Logic Application.

Alarm The first is an example of alarm grouping, shown in Figure 6-20. In this
Grouping script, several digital inputs are OR’ed together. The script is triggered
when one of the digital input trigger point triggers an SOE/COS event.
The result is written to a pseudo digital input whose value reflects
whether one or more of the digital inputs are asserted.

Figure 6-20: Alarm Grouping

Analog Input The second example, shown in Figure 6-21, demonstrates how an
Counter analog pseudo point might be manipulated. In this example, an analog
pseudo point is incremented each time a digital input changes state.
Thus, the analog input pseudo point acts as a counter.

Figure 6-21: Pseudo Analog Input as a Counter

This script is configured to trigger on the change of state of an
SOE/COS. In this example, each time LINK4.RD1.PSD15 changes
state, the analog pseudo point LINK2.RD1.PSD17 is incremented by
one. Note that the analog pseudo point was set up to have an initial
start value of 0 ensuring that the counter will start at 0 on power up.

Multiple The third example, shown in Figure 6-22: demonstrates tripping multiple
Outputs breakers on a condition. If the condition is met (i.e. analog input
LINK2.RD1.RAI1 is less than 16856 and both digital inputs
LINK2.RD1.RDI3 and LINK2.RD1.RDI4 have a value of 1), several
digital outputs are operated. In a substation, these outputs could be
connected to circuit breaker trip coils. This would result in breakers 1

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 398

 through 9 tripping. Note that this script is set to run periodically.

Figure 6-22: Multiple Breaker Trip

This script is only meant as an example of how to program
scripts in DAPstudio™. Note that, in this example, the
breakers would not open simultaneously. The DAPserver™
would issue nine separate commands to the downline IED. This would
make it unsuitable for a real world application such as load shedding.

Start Up The following example closes a digital output for three seconds one
time on start up. To set a script up to run only at system start up,
choose “Start Up” from the Run Method drop down list.

Figure 6-23: Script that Runs at System Start Up

The last Logic Application example, shown in Figure 6-24, shows how
to set a script up to run “On Condition”. In this example,
LINK2.RD1.RD01 is closed for 3 seconds, after which
LINK2.RD1.RD01 is opened for 1 second. This is repeated continually
while LIK2.RD1.RDI1 has a value of 1. The condition is shown in the
Script Editor window and the actual script is shown in the Logic
Application window.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 399

 Figure 6-24: Running Scripts “On Condition”
To set the condition, choose the “On Condition” option from the Run
Method drop down list then left-click the “Condition” button. This will
open the Script Editing window. Declare a discrete variable and test the
condition under which the script should run. If the condition is satisfied,
set the discrete variable to 1 and return the value. If the condition is not
satisfied, set the discrete variable to 0 and return the value. As implied,
the script will run whenever a 1 is returned from the condition test.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 400

Calculated Pseudo Points
Introduction A pseudo point is a point that exists in the DAPserver™ database but is
not a physical point in the system. A pseudo point is simply a reserved
space in the DAPserver™’s memory that can be accessed in the same
way that a real point can. An example of a real or physical point, on the
other hand, would be a digital output (DO) point that is capable of
opening a breaker by activating a control point. Pseudo points can be
added as needed.

Creating a This section details how to create a new pseudo point such that a script
New Pseudo can be written in the Logic Application to alter the value of a pseudo
Point point directly. To add a new pseudo point:

1. Open a DAPstudio™ project of interest by left clicking on the

project.
2. Open either a device pseudo point or protocol pseudo point list and
scroll to the bottom. Ensure that the list being viewed is under the
“Basic Information” tab.
3. Create a new pseudo point by right clicking Pseudo Point, selecting
the “New Point” option, entering the point’s information and left-
clicking the “OK” button.
4. Ensure that the data types under the Value Type and Point Type
columns are compatible.
5. In the drop down list in the Calculate Method column, choose the
“System” option.
6. Exit out of DAPstudio™, a message will prompt you to confirm, left-
click the “Yes” button. DAPstudio™ will prompt you to save
changes before closing the project, left-click the “Yes” button. Re-
open the DAPstudio™ project; the new point will appear as the last
point in the list for the device of interests.
It is recommended that you create a new pseudo point for a
particular function rather than modifying one that already
exists. Existing pseudo points most likely have pre-defined
functionality in the system.

Example In the following example, the script is triggered on the condition that the
DNP 3 health alarm has been triggered. The script outputs an ASCII
string describing which DNP IIN bit is set that triggered the health
alarm. The script is shown in Figure 6-25.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 401

 Figure 6-25: Script for a “Message” Pseudo Point
The result of the script running is shown in Figure 6-26 and Figure 6-27.
In this setup, The different IIN bits are being forced to trigger on and off
to display the different messages.

Figure 6-26: Normal condition Reflected in DAPstudio™

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 402

 Figure 6-27: Forced Event Buffer Bit Reflected in
DAPstudio™
System pseudo points are protected against deletion. If a
pseudo point needs to be deleted, ensure that the pseudo point
is not a System point before attempting deletion. If the pseudo
point is a System point, the pseudo point can easily be changed to a
User point (in the Point Ownership column under the “Basic
Information” tab, left-click on the drop down list and select the “User”
option).

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 403

Control Lockout
Scripts can be written that control whether or not a control is prevented
from being executed depending on certain conditions present within the
system. This is also known as control interlock. Unlike “Calculated
Pseudo Points”, these scripts cannot be written in Logic Application.
Instead, these scripts are written for each point in the system where
lockout control is desired. This approach allows easy management and
maintenance of the scripts.
To create an interlock script, open the digital output point list under the
device of interest. For each point, scripts can be created to control trip
and close operations independently. In this example, a lockout
condition for close operations on a digital output 1 is demonstrated. To
edit the script, navigate to the digital output point list and left-click on the
“Associate & Lock” tab. Then, left click on the symbol circled in Figure
6-28 below. As previously discussed, this action will bring up the Script
Editing window.

Figure 6-28: Creating a Control Lockout Script

The Script Editing window including the control lockout script is shown
in Figure 6-29. In this example, if LINK2.RD1.RAI1 is greater than 123
and LINK2.RD1.RDI5 is 1, the DAPserver™ will prevent close operation
requests from being executed on DO 01. Note that both conditions
must be met for the lockout to take effect because the conditions are
logically AND’ed together.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 404

 Figure 6-29: Control Lockout Script

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 405

Batch Control
Introduction Using Batch Control, control outputs can be programmed to operate at
a configured time on a daily, weekly or monthly basis. Conditions can
also be added to add control lockout on a script-by-script basis.

Starting the Open or create a new DAPstudio™ project, from the DAPstudio™ Main
Logic window left-click twice on the “Logic Application” icon as shown in
Application Figure 6-30 to gain access to the Logic Application and Batch Control
scripting functions.

Figure 6-30: DAPstudio™ Main Window

The window shown in Figure 6-31 will then appear.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 406

 Figure 6-31: Batch Control, Logic Application Startup Window

Adding a The window pictured in Figure 6-31 does not have any scripts
New Script associated with either the Batch Control or Logic Application methods.
To add a Batch Control script, right-click “Batch Control” and select the
“New” option.
The window shown in Figure 6-32 will then appear.

Figure 6-32: New Script Window

Enter the desired name of the script in the Name input field and left-
click the “OK” button to create the script. The script name will then
appear under the method chosen. In this example, Batch Control was
chosen so that is where the script named “Batch Control” should
appear. This is shown in Figure 6-33.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 407

 Figure 6-33: New Batch Control Script

Script Editor To edit the script, left-click on the script name. The Script Editing
window will then open as shown in Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34: Script Editing Screen for “Batch Control”

Note that this is the Script Editing screen for the Batch Control method
of writing scripts. As seen earlier, the screen for Logic Application is
different. This is due to the different functionality options available in
each method.

Batch Batch controls are always associated with a digital input. The first step
Control in setting up a Batch Control digital output point is to associate a digital
Setup input. Under the device of interest, open the digital input point list and
left-click on the “Associate & Lock” tab as shown in Figure 6-35.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 408

 Figure 6-35: Associating Digital Inputs with Batch Control Digital
Outputs
Left-click on the drop down menu (circled in red in Figure 6-35). Search
for the desired digital output point, left-click twice on the point and left-
click the “OK” button to select the point.
Controls can now be set up to operate at specified times in the Batch
Control Editing window. Navigate to the Batch Control window as
described above to enter the desired data.
In order to operate controls at the configured times, digital inputs
associated with digital outputs must be configured. This is done in the
right hand lower panel of the Batch Control Editing window. Left-click
“Select” as shown in Figure 6-34 and the window shown in Figure 6-36
will appear. Scroll to the desired point as shown in Figure 6-36. When
the desired point is found, left-click twice on the point and left-click the
“OK” button to add the point.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 409

 Figure 6-36: Selecting Digital Input Points Associated with
Digital Output Points
Note that multiple digital input points can be specified in the
pane. The digital outputs associated with the digital inputs
configured here will all execute at the times specified in script
(see Figure 6-37 to see where the times are configured). If different
digital outputs operate at different times are desired, separate scripts
will need to be created.

Figure 6-37: Batch Control at 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 410

 Digital outputs that are configured to operate simultaneously
will not do so. The digital outputs will be executed up to 10
seconds apart.
Figure 6-37 shows an example of controls enabled to close at 8:00 in
the morning and again at 8:00 in the evening (20:00 hours) for one
minute. There is no control lockout condition. Note that there are a
close start time and a close end time. While one would intuitively think
that the control would automatically open at 8:01 (close end time), this
is not the case. The control must be explicitly told to open at 8:01, as
shown in Figure 6-38. Note the Open Period window time values.

Figure 6-38: Batch Control Open

Figure 6-39 shows a Batch Control script that will execute at 12:00 daily
for one minute unless LINK2.RD1.RAI1 has a value greater than 10000
and LINK2.RD1.DI10 is not set. As with control lockouts on a point-be-
point basis, if a 1 is returned by the script the control(s) are locked out.
If a 0 is returned, the controls will operate at the configured times.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 411

 Figure 6-39: Batch Control with Lockout

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 412

Programming Examples using Conditional Statements
Introduction Following are a few programming examples to demonstrate some of the
syntax not presented thus far. The examples are presented as screen
shots from the actual script editor. All examples have been tested and
proven to run correctly on a DAPserver™.

WHILE Loop In the following routine:

LINK2.RD1.RDI1 is a real point being monitored.
LINK2.RD1.PSD16 is a DAPserver™ pseudo analog input.
LINK2.RD1.PSD17 is a DAPserver™ pseudo point of type
MESSAGE.
LINK2.RD1.PSD18 is a DAPserver™ pseudo digital input.

Figure 6-40: WHILE Loop Example

The routine continues to loop until LINK2.RD1.RDI1 is detected with a
value of 1. While LINK2.RD1.RDI1 is 0, you are informed that the
routine is in the loop by writing a message to LINK2.RD1.PSD17.
LINK2.RD1.PSD18 is set to 1 so that the “WHILE loop is now running”
message is only output once. The main function of the loop is to
incremented LINK2.RD1.PSD16 every 2 seconds.
When LINK2.RD1.RDI1 is detected high, the script drops out of the
loop. You are informed of this through LINK2.RD1.PSD17 and
LINK2.RD1.PSD18 being re-initialized to 0.
When LINK2.RD1.RDI1 is cleared, the counter will resume where it left
off when LINK2.RD1.RDI1 has a value of 1 and you are again informed
that the routine is inside the WHILE loop.

FOR Loop Figure 6-41shows an example of how to use a FOR loop. In this
routine, LINK2.RD1.PSD16 takes on the value of count during each
step of the loop after which there is a 1 second delay. The loop only

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 413

 runs when digital input LINK2.RD1.RDI1 has a value of 0. Note that
once the loop is entered, the loop will continue to run to completion
regardless of the state of LINK2.RD1.RDI1.

Figure 6-41: FOR Loop Example

FOR Loop Figure 6-42 shows an example of how to break out of a loop early,
with Early using a BREAK statement. In this case, when LINK2.RD1.RDI1 is
BREAK detected high (1), the FOR loop is ended early, and will proceed to the
line LINK2.RD1.PSD17 = “FOR loop has ended” as the next operation.

Figure 6-42: FOR Loop with Early Break

SWITCH Figure 6-43 demonstrates how a switch statement is used. In this

Statement example, if LINK2.RD1.RAI1 has a value of 1, LINK2.RD1.RDO1 is
operated. A value of 2 causes LINK2.RD1.RDO2 to be operated. Each
output will operate one time only. This restriction is achieved through
the use of LINK2.RD1.PSD19 and LINK2.RD1.PSD20 that are used as
flags and configured to have in initial value of 0 at power up. The
position within the switch statement is reflected in LINK2.RD1.PSD17.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 414

 Figure 6-43: SWITCH Statement

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 415

Bit Operators and the Modulo Operator
The following seven examples demonstrate how to use the bit operators
available in the scripting language as well as the Modulo operator.
While the use of these operators is common in programming, they are
less familiar to those without a programming background.

The examples are prefaced with a comment line to

explain the operation in both binary and decimal
followed by the script code. The code is presented in
Figure 6-44 as a screen capture from the script editor.
Figure 6-45 shows the initial values of the pseudo points before the
script was executed while Figure 6-46 shows the values after the script
was executed.

Figure 6-44: Bit Operators, the Modulo (%) Operator and XOR
implementation

Figure 6-45: Pseudo Point Values Before Running Scripts

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 416

 Figure 6-46: Pseudo Point Values After Running Scripts
Seven pseudo points of type INTEGER, PS18 to PS24, were modified
by each of the lines in the script. The scripts are configured to run once
at start-up.
In the first example, LINK4.RD1.PS18 was configured to have an initial
value of 0. The pseudo point is then logically OR’ed with bit 4 (1610)
followed by bit 1 (210) which has the effect of setting those bits to 1. The
result is 100102 or 1810 (where the subscript 2 indicates a base 2
number, i.e. binary, and the subscript 10 indicates a base 10 number,
i.e. decimal).
In the second example, LINK4.RD1.PS19 was configured to have an
initial value of 25510 (111111112). The pseudo point is then logically
AND’ed with 25310 (111111012) and 23910 (111011112) which has the
effect of clearing bits 1 and 4. The result is 111011012 (23710).
In the third example, LINK4.RD1.PS20 was configured to have an initial
value of 8510 (010101012). This value was inverted and AND’ed with
25510 to yield a result of 17010 (101010102). Note that LINK4.RD1.PS20
was declared as an unsigned integer which is treated as a 32 bit
number in the DAP Server. The result was AND’ed with 255 in order to
remove the high 24 bits that were the result of the inversion i.e. the
straight inversion of 01010101 would have yielded 11111111 11111111
11111111 10101010 as a result.
In the fourth example, PS21 was configured to have an initial value of
1310 (000011012). LINK4.RD1.PS21 was shifted left by three bit
positions to yield a value of 10410 (011010002).
In the fifth example, PS22 was configured to have an initial value of
19210 (110000002). LINK4.RD1.PS22 was shifted left by four bit
positions to yield a value of 1210 (000011002).
In the sixth example, the concept of “modulo” is introduced. The
Modulo (%) operator calculates the remainder from a division operation.
In this example, the remainder of 93 / 6 operation is calculated and the
result of 3 is output to LINK4.RD1.PS23.
In the last example, XOR is implemented using a couple AND and OR
operators. The arithmetic formula for a XOR operation is (AB’ + A’B). In

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 417

 this example, 17010 (101010102) XOR 8510 (010101012) yields 25510
(111111112)

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 418

Overview
The SSH tunnel can be used to securely form a TCP connection from a remote
PC to a device behind a DAPmini. Although the figure gives the example of telnet
to a D20/D25, an SSH tunnel to any TCP port can be formed (HTTP, etc…)

Substation

SSH Tunnel DAPmini

Remote PC

D20/D25 D20/D25

Substation LAN

D20/D25 D20/D25

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 419

Vport Config Utility
With DAPstudio installed you can connect to the SSH tunnel using the VPort
Config Utility. Simply configure a tunnel, then click on the create tunnel button.
You can then access the device on the Local PC through the port configured.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 420

Windows Script
The Windows Script requires that OpenSSH (http://sshwindows.sourceforge.net/)
be installed on the PC and that the C:\windows\system32\drivers\etc\RTU file is
defined. The script will lookup the entry in the RTU file and forms a tunnel to the
DAPserver port. To use the tunnel after formation simply telnet to localhost. This
tunnel is functional for other telnet clients such as the ConfigPro Terminal
Emulator.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 421

Linux Script
A Linux script called wesmaint has been written to make the process of
connecting to the D20 / D25 simpler. The syntax of the script is wesmaint <RTU
NAME> [-p localport] [-u user name] If no port is specified the script will use the
same port defined as the remote port. If no username is specified the current
user name will be used. The execution of this script is dependent on having the
following file defined: /etc/RTU. This file defines the RTU parameters. Each line
is an RTU definition and has the following syntax: <RTU NAME> <DAPserver
Host Name or address> <Port> If the expect package is installed the script will
automatically telnet to the local port configured and will automatically enter the
username and password defined at the start of the script. Otherwise the script
will simply telnet to the local port.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 422

Vport Configuration
A port can be configured in the DAPserver to be forwarded to another device. If
Authentication is not enabled the port is accessible without authentication.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 423

Overview The DAPserver™ Digital Automation Platforms (DAP™) have been
designed and verified using the most advanced and reliable equipment.
Proper installation and testing of the DAP™ product during
commissioning will ensure a high level of reliability of the installed
product.
Before sending a unit back to the factory, we strongly recommend you
follow the recommendations below. Even if it will not always resolve the
problem, at least they will help to define it better for a faster turn around.
If you need to send a device back to the factory for repair, please use
the appropriate RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORISATION process, and
follow the shipping instructions provided by our Service Department,
especially in the case of international shipments. This will lead to a
faster and more efficient resolution of your problem.
Many of the internal parts/devices inside of the DAPserver™
are highly sensitive to Electro Static Discharge (ESD), please
ensure that you practice proper ESD procedures whenever
performing any tests on the DAPserver™ or replacing any of the
swappable cards to avoid potential equipment failure.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 424

Firmware
Symptom The hardware is OK but some protocols are experiencing problems

Possible Incorrect Configuration

Cause

Action Please reference the relevant section of the DAPstudio™ User Manual
for the application that you are experiencing difficulty with to ensure that
all parameters have been configured correctly.

Possible Outdated Firmware Note: DAPStudio 5 is not backward compatible with

Cause older DAPStudio 4 versions and will not connect to the older firmware
versions.

Action Check the version of firmware in the DAPserver™ and update to latest
available.
To check the firmware version in the DAPserver™, open windows
internet explorer and enter http://192.168.0.210/ to access the
DAPserver™. Then verify the firmware version, enabled DAP functions
and protocols as shown next.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 425

VPort
Symptom Unable to connect to the remote device using VPort, or the information
is not readable, but communication between the PC and DAPserver™
is active.

Possible The COM port has been defined more then once in your current
Cause configuration

Recommended Check the COM port used for the VPort Device, and check all other
Action applications in the configuration to make sure that no other device is
using the same COM port for the communication channel. If the COM
port is used by another device, change to a different COM port that is
not currently being used, and re-download the configuration.

Possible The configuration for the VPort application was created but was not
Cause saved.

Recommended Click the save button and re-download the configuration.

Action

Possible Firewall function is enabled, but the port number for the Virtual Port is
Cause not added to the list of allowed ports.

Recommended Follow the instructions below to add the port in the IP Table.
Action
1. Open DAPstudio™.

2. Double click on VPort Application menu icon.

3. Click on the VPort device to open up the property window.

4. Record the port number that is being used by this device.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 426

 5. From the drop down menu, click on System, then select Configure
IP Table.
6. The figure below shows the window that will pop up, select Upload
and Configure, then click Next.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 427

 7. Enter the IP address of the DAPserver™ port that the PC is
connected to and select Next.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 428

 8. The following figure will display what is in the IP Table in the
DAPserver™. Enter the login information, pass word is admin, click
Login.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 429

 9. Click on the IP address in the left that corresponds to your PC’s IP.
Then in the “Other” field, add the Port number that was recorded in
step 4. Click Add/Modify to add the port. Click next to go on the
next screen.
10. Enter the IP address of the DAPserver™, click Finish to download.

11. After the download is finished, a message will appear to tell the
user that download has been successful. The port number for the
virtual port has now been successfully added to the IP Table.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 430

DAPserver™

DAPstudio™ DAPstudio™ not coming online for the first time.

Offline

Possible There is no communication link.

Cause

Recommended select Tools > Connect then follow the procedure below for
Action DAPstudio™ to go online with the DAPserver™

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 431

DAPserver™ DAPserver™ not coming online.
offline

Possible The PC Ethernet port used to communicate with DAPserver™

Cause is not configured on the same subnet as the DAPserver™. Or
incorrect or faulty Ethernet cable. IP address may be incorrect.

Recommended The PC Ethernet port used to communicate with DAPserver™

Action must be configured on the same subnet as the DAPserver™.
And ensure cable and IP address are correct.

Ping Use Ping (Packet Internet Groper) command to verify the

IP Address is active.

ASAT Solutions Inc. Version 3.02 432